JP7016786B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Patent Document 1, as a gaming machine that executes an effect in response to an operation of an operating means, an operation promotion display prompting the operation of the operating means is displayed during a variable display or a stop display of a decorative symbol. A gaming machine has been proposed that displays regardless of the situation and changes the display mode of the operation promotion display.

JP-A-2017-164504 (Fig. 97)

In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the production performed by the movement of the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of a production performed by a player's movement.

The gaming machine of means A is
It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
An action effect execution means that can execute an action effect by the action of the player,
A movement promotion display execution means that can execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player's movement,
An operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display related to the operation effect,
An action effect executing means capable of executing an action effect acting on the operation-related display is provided.
As the display mode of the specific display, there are a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a specific mode.
As the specific aspect, there are a plurality of aspects including the first specific aspect and the second specific aspect.
As the display mode of the operation-related display, there are a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode.
When the operation-related display is displayed in the second aspect, the ratio of the operation-related display being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that when the operation-related display is displayed in the first aspect.
The operation-related display means can change the display mode of the operation-related display, and when the display mode of the operation-related display is changed, the specific-related display related to the specific display can be displayed. It is possible
When the operation-related display is displayed, the operation promotion display executing means can display an operation promotion display in a mode different from the operation promotion display corresponding to the display mode of the operation-related display.
The action effect executing means has, as the action effect, a first action effect for displaying the first specific related display which is the specific related display related to the first specific aspect, and the specific action effect related to the second specific aspect. It is possible to execute the second action effect that displays the second specific related display, which is the related display.
When the second action effect is executed, the proportion of the operation-related display displayed in the second aspect is higher than when the first action effect is executed.
The gaming machine of means Z1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying specific display (hold display) corresponding to variable display, and
An operation effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (cut-in notice effect, result notification effect) by the action of the player, and
A movement promotion display execution means that can execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player's movement,
An operation-related display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001) related to the operation effect is provided.
As the display mode of the operation-related display, there are a plurality of modes including the first mode (normal mode) and the second mode (second special mode).
When the operation-related display is displayed in the second aspect, the ratio of the operation-related display being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that when the operation-related display is displayed in the first aspect (FIG. 11-8 (A)). As shown in the above, the operation-related display of the first special mode to the third special mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the operation-related display of the normal mode).
The operation-related display means can change the display mode of the operation-related display, and when the display mode of the operation-related display is changed, the specific-related display related to the specific display can be displayed. It is possible (as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (7) to (10), when the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display is the second specific mode (sword shape), the hold display (preliminary notice target). ) Is executed, the third change suggestion effect (sword) is executed. If the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display is the first specific mode (hammer type), the hold is performed. The second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed when the variation display corresponding to the display (notice target) is executed. When the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display is the normal mode (round shape), the display mode is executed. The first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is executed or neither change suggestion effect is executed when the variation display corresponding to the hold display (notice target or non-notice target) is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the change of the operation-related display with the specific display.

The gaming machine of means Z2 is
It is a gaming machine of means Z1
The operation effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display an operation promotion display for encouraging a player's operation in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation-related display (special operation promotion display 04TM035 is a normal mode). The operation-related display 04TM003 of the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B corresponds to the operation-related display of the second special mode. It corresponds to 04TM001, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the third special aspect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the motion promotion display with the display mode of the motion-related display.

The gaming machine of means Z3 is
A gaming machine of means Z1 or means Z2,
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001), and the operation-related display corresponding to one operation effect (result notification effect). It is possible to change the display mode of the first operation-related display 04TM001 a plurality of times (as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the change timing of the first operation-related display 04TM001 is the timing after the start of the variation display (FIG. 11-). (Timing of T8 shown in 14), and the change timing of the second operation-related display 04TM001 is the timing after the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice is completed (timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 11-14). Is)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the chances of changing the display mode of the motion-related display are increased, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Z4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Z1 to means Z3.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001).
The first notice effect (first SU notice effect) for notifying that the control is controlled to the advantageous state and the second notice effect (second SU notice effect) for suggesting that the display mode of the operation-related display changes are executed. Equipped with a possible notice effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
At least a part of the first notice effect and the second notice effect are common (as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the first stage of the first SU notice effect and the second SU notice effect. (Step 1) is a common production mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which of the first notice effect and the second notice effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

The gaming machine of means Z5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Z1 to means Z4.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001).
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state is provided.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) displays the operation-related display before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (1) to 11-17 (13), the reach state. The operation-related display 04TM001 is displayed before the establishment), and it is possible to change the display mode of the operation-related display before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), reach. Before the state is established, the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 can be changed from the normal mode to the first special mode).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the motion-related display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Z6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Z1 to means Z5.
The display mode of the operation-related display includes a third mode corresponding to the notification that the operation-related display is controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the final display mode of the operation-related display is In the case of the third special mode [crack (large)], a big hit is obtained at a rate of 100%).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the motion-related display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Z7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Z1 to means Z6.
Motion detection means (spherical button 04TM102A) that detects the motion of the player, and
A changing means (CPU 120 for effect control) that changes the mode of the motion detecting means is provided.
The changing means can change the mode of the motion detecting means in accordance with the display mode of the motion-related display (as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (19), the second special of the spherical button 04TM102A. The aspect corresponds to the second special aspect of the operation-related display 04TM001, and as shown in FIG. 11-19 (25), the first special aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A and the first special aspect of the operation-related display 04TM001 correspond. In addition, the third special aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A and the third special aspect of the operation-related display 04TM001 correspond to each other.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the motion-related display with the mode of the motion detection means.

The gaming machine of means Z8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Z1 to means Z7.
The operation effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
The motion promotion display that encourages the player's motion can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the motion-related display (the special operation promotion display 04TM035 corresponds to the motion-related display 04TM001 of the normal mode, and the first The special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the second special mode, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the third special aspect),
When the operation-related display is displayed, it is possible to display an operation promotion display in a mode different from the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation-related display (shown in FIGS. 11-17 (15)). As described above, when the operation-related display 04TM001 of the second special aspect is displayed, it is possible to display the operation promotion display 04TM030 that prompts the operation of the push button 04TM102B).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the motion promotion display which is not related to the display mode of the motion promotion display, it is possible to increase the variety of the motion promotion display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Z9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Z1 to means Z8.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001).
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect) suggesting that the display mode of the operation-related display changes. )
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect) as the change suggestion effect.
The rate at which the display mode of the operation-related display changes differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-9, the second change suggestion effect is better than the first change suggestion effect. The rate at which the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 changes is high, and the third change suggestion effect changes the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 at a rate of 100%).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the motion-related display by paying attention to which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in JP-A-2017-164504 (FIG. 97), as a gaming machine that executes an effect in response to an operation of the operating means, an operation promoting display for prompting the operation of the operating means is displayed on the decorative symbol. A gaming machine has been proposed that displays the variable display or the stop display regardless of whether the display is variable or the stop display, and changes the display mode of the operation promotion display. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2017-164504 (FIG. 97), there is room for improving the interest of the production performed by the movement of the player. The inventions relating to the means Y1 to the means Y9 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the production performed by the movement of the player.

The gaming machine of means Y1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying specific display (hold display) corresponding to variable display, and
An operation effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (cut-in notice effect, result notification effect) by the action of the player, and
An operation-related display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001) related to the operation effect is provided.
As the display mode of the operation-related display, there are a plurality of modes including the first mode (normal mode) and the second mode (first special mode, second special mode, or third special mode).
When the operation-related display is displayed in the second aspect, the ratio of the operation-related display being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that when the operation-related display is displayed in the first aspect (FIG. 11-8 (A)). As shown in the above, the operation-related display of the first special mode to the third special mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the operation-related display of the normal mode).
The proportion of the operation-related display displayed in the second aspect differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (as shown in FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11, the display mode of the hold display changes. In the case of, the rate of changing the display mode of the operation-related display is higher than that in the case where the display mode of the hold display has not changed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the specific display with the display mode of the operation-related display.

The gaming machine of means Y2 is
It is a gaming machine of means Y1 and
The operation effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can display an operation promotion display for encouraging a player's operation in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation-related display (special operation promotion display 04TM035 is a normal mode). The operation-related display 04TM003 of the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B corresponds to the operation-related display of the second special mode. It corresponds to 04TM001, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the third special aspect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the motion promotion display with the display mode of the motion-related display.

The gaming machine of means Y3 is
A gaming machine of means Y1 or means Y2,
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001), and the operation-related display corresponding to one operation effect (result notification effect). It is possible to change the display mode of the first operation-related display 04TM001 a plurality of times (as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the change timing of the first operation-related display 04TM001 is the timing after the start of the variation display (FIG. 11-). (Timing of T8 shown in 14), and the change timing of the second operation-related display 04TM001 is the timing after the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice is completed (timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 11-14). Is)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the chances of changing the display mode of the motion-related display are increased, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Y4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Y1 to means Y3.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001).
The first notice effect (first SU notice effect) for notifying that the control is controlled to the advantageous state and the second notice effect (second SU notice effect) for suggesting that the display mode of the operation-related display changes are executed. Equipped with a possible notice effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
At least a part of the first notice effect and the second notice effect are common (as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the first stage of the first SU notice effect and the second SU notice effect. (Step 1) is a common production mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which of the first notice effect and the second notice effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the first notice effect and the second notice effect.

The gaming machine of means Y5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Y1 to means Y4.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001).
A specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state is provided.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) displays the operation-related display before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (1) to 11-17 (13), the reach state. The operation-related display 04TM001 is displayed before the establishment), and it is possible to change the display mode of the operation-related display before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), reach. Before the state is established, the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 can be changed from the normal mode to the first special mode).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the motion-related display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Y6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Y1 to means Y5.
The display mode of the operation-related display includes a third mode corresponding to the notification that the operation-related display is controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the final display mode of the operation-related display is In the case of the third special mode [crack (large)], a big hit is obtained at a rate of 100%).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the motion-related display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Y7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Y1 to means Y6.
Motion detection means (spherical button 04TM102A) that detects the motion of the player, and
A changing means (CPU 120 for effect control) that changes the mode of the motion detecting means is provided.
The changing means can change the mode of the motion detecting means in accordance with the display mode of the motion-related display (as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (19), the second special of the spherical button 04TM102A. The aspect corresponds to the second special aspect of the operation-related display 04TM001, and as shown in FIG. 11-19 (25), the first special aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A and the first special aspect of the operation-related display 04TM001 correspond. In addition, the third special aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A and the third special aspect of the operation-related display 04TM001 correspond to each other.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the motion-related display with the mode of the motion detection means.

The gaming machine of means Y8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Y1 to means Y7.
The operation effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
The motion promotion display that encourages the player's motion can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the motion-related display (the special operation promotion display 04TM035 corresponds to the motion-related display 04TM001 of the normal mode, and the first The special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the second special mode, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C corresponds to the operation-related display 04TM001 of the third special aspect),
When the operation-related display is displayed, it is possible to display an operation promotion display in a mode different from the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation-related display (shown in FIGS. 11-17 (15)). As described above, when the operation-related display 04TM001 of the second special aspect is displayed, it is possible to display the operation promotion display 04TM030 that prompts the operation of the push button 04TM102B).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the motion promotion display which is not related to the display mode of the motion promotion display, it is possible to increase the variety of the motion promotion display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Y9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Y1 to means Y8.
The operation-related display means (effect control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation-related display (operation-related display 04TM001).
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect) suggesting that the display mode of the operation-related display changes. )
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect) as the change suggestion effect.
The rate at which the display mode of the operation-related display changes differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (as shown in FIGS. 11-9, the second change suggestion effect is better than the first change suggestion effect. The rate at which the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 changes is high, and the third change suggestion effect changes the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 at a rate of 100%).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the motion-related display by paying attention to which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

A gaming machine that displays a title notifying the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428). In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect of production. The inventions relating to the means J1 to the means J8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having an enhanced effect.

The gaming machine related to means J1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means J2 is the gaming machine of means J1.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J3 is the gaming machine of the means J1 or the means J2.
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a preview effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of the means J4 is a gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J3.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible and
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J5 is the gaming machine of the means J4.
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J6 is a gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J5.
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J7 is a gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J6.
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B), and
Further, a specific display executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I). )),
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J), (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J8 is the gaming machine of any of the means J1 to the means J7.
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). Display by) and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 etc. displayed at the time of reach title production shown in FIG. Further equipped with means (for example, an image display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different embodiments (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d). Etc.) can be displayed, and a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d)).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions relating to the means K1 to the means K7 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means K1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
Equipped with a display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005). ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than that of the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information as the information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving the interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. At the same time, it is possible to be interested in the aspects of the first information and the second information.

The gaming machine of means K2 is
Means K1 gaming machine
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star-shaped display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the mode after the change is different between the first information and the second information, each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The expectation of a big hit is higher when is in the red form)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means K4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 10-9 (FIG. 10-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in the red aspect having the same display color is used. Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105), and the second is corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 10-9 (FIG. 10-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (red star-shaped display) shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub-active display 30TM005c (red) has the same display color. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved, and at the same time, it is possible to make an interest in the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means K5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K4.
It is equipped with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second notification effect is also executed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 10-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means K6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the first action effect and the second action effect is different, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means K7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 10-3, active). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions relating to the means L1 to the means L7 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
Equipped with a display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005). ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the advance notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is. When changed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, the complexity of the production is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
It is a gaming machine of means L1 and
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star-shaped display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the mode after the change is different between the first information and the second information, each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The expectation of a big hit is higher when is in the red form)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 10-9 (FIG. 10-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in the red aspect having the same display color is used. Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105), and the second is corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 10-9 (FIG. 10-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004 (red star-shaped display) shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub-active display 30TM005c (red) has the same display color. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved, and at the same time, it is possible to make an interest in the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L4.
It is equipped with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second notification effect is also executed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 10-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the first action effect and the second action effect is different, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 10-3, active). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means M1 to M6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means M1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
A change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes is provided.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as the change suggestion effect of the success mode (as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) and (2)). An effect of changing the aspect) and an effect of suggesting a change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (10) and (20), an effect in which the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) after the temporary stop is performed within the predetermined period (for example, from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach state) from the start of the change. The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the temporary stop of the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol), and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The rate of execution is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means M2 is
Means M1 gaming machine
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the final display of the active display). Expectations for big hits differ depending on the mode),
The ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous. The higher the number of hits, the higher the expectation of big hits.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 10-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change either)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The gaming machine of means M4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (1), after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears. , As shown in FIG. 10-18 (4), execute the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means M5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and the like. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect in which character D appears.
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed differs, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, than the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means M1 to means M5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 10-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means N1 to N6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
A change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes is provided.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means is such that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as the change suggestion effect of the success mode (as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) and 10-18 (2)). The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of suggesting a change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character D is repelled by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. It is possible to perform a production that does not allow
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, the decorative symbol (combination of decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) is provisional from the start of fluctuation). Within the period until the stop, and within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right) Correspondingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode] with respect to the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect]. As the ratio of And when it is 4/5, the display mode is a red mode with a higher expectation of a big hit.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
It is a gaming machine of means N1 and
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) differs depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the jackpot expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
The ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous. The higher the number of hits, the higher the expectation of big hits.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 10-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change either)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (1), after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears. , As shown in FIG. 10-18 (4), execute the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and the like. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect in which character D appears.
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed differs, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-17, than the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. For gaming machines as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to a setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) relating to a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case of being controlled by the setting change mode and the case of being controlled by the setting confirmation mode (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
It is a gaming machine of means O1 and
A game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the setting of the RAM clear flag in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150) for initializing the game state.
The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continue to output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is completed and the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the setting is changed. When controlled to the mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting processing by the setting means. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) in the setting change mode. In step S21TM4580, the setting changing flag is set based on the shift to the setting changing mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102, which stores the setting changing flag), and the setting changing mode is terminated. Based on this, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In this case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). Is characterized by the fact that it is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means is
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode". Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to urge the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied). ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
It is a gaming machine of means P1 and
The setting change mode control means has satisfied the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (at the time of turning on the power, all in steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition controlled by the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In this case), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means is
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode". Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to urge the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the gaming state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
It is a gaming machine of means Q1 and
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set at the time of turning on the power (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends).
The setting change mode control means said when the power supply to the game machine was started, regardless of whether or not the transition operation was performed when the specific information was stored in the specific information storage means. It is controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set at the time of turning on the power (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a setting value storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing the setting value (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
When the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power off occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a setting value storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing the setting value (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. And confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the setting value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not terminated, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the game control main processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is confirmed. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding the type of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is a top view which shows the spherical button of this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 11-1 showing a state in which the split hemisphere is in a fully closed state. It is BB sectional view of FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11-2 showing a state in which the split hemisphere is in a fully open state. It is an operation explanatory diagram which shows the change of the open state of a split hemisphere. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold display and operation-related display. It is a flowchart which shows the change suggestion effect decision process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table of the operation-related display, and (B), (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table of the operation-related display. be. (F) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the mode of the first change suggestion effect, and (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the mode of the second change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the hold display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process at the time of a change start. (L) and (M) are explanatory views showing a table for deciding whether or not to execute the SU notice effect, and (N) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode determination table of the first SU notice effect, (O). Is an explanatory diagram showing a cut-in notice effect determination table. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when the change suggestion effect is executed twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case which the change suggestion effect is executed twice, or the change suggestion effect is executed once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case which the change suggestion effect is executed twice, or the change suggestion effect is executed once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode at the time of performing a change suggestion effect twice. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when the change suggestion effect is executed once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case which change suggestion effect is executed once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in the case where the display mode of the operation-related display becomes the third special mode.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead determination, etc. is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. It is updated to 7 "and the production process during the big hit is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the display result is "loss" without the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode. -2, the variation pattern of reach loss where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the display result is "loss" PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively aroused and the effect of production is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "Super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. In addition, although FIG. 8-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 8-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, the title is notified. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expectation degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the title notification is terminated before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 8-4. As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first, and then the stage. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and 8-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F), the black stars are highlighted as if they shine. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but the black stars are two. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

8-5 (G) to 8-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and 8-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive production) may be made different in the production mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK060 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled by the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and this order (ascending order) is provided. ), The reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, but the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the action mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5, the transferred zone. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

8-10 and 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is centered as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed, and a display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

In addition, in the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red characters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 8-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a ally character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and 8-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, it is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is promoted. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with various winning information regarding winning. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for game ball detection, various signals such as a power supply cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are incorporated into the main board 11 to capture a game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is enclosed in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entry area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio of consecutive ratios and the ratio of roles after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. The operating voltage of is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. As shown in FIG. 2, the outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-mentioned switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the door frame 3a is connected, and various abnormalities are obtained based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Output a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted and received at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize is set. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066 are provided with a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted / received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises an XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects a fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and gives a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value as a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. It is provided separately, and the big hit is determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 9-5, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process in step S21TM1010 or later. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, weighting is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operation (step S21TM1040).

Then, the CPU 103 performs initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), etc.) (step S21TM1050), and then performs the RAM 102. Set to the accessible state (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is set. This mode indicates the interrupt address.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, for the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). Change the set value and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to set the state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the setting value is not permitted to be changed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2). ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. I can't. Even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition of (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When the closed state is set, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the lock switch 21TM4760 is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is described later in step S21TM4760. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. If it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set in the check of the setting changing flag (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140) indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without the CPU 103 executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The indicated setting value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 has performed a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Despite the possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Further, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value cannot be changed, so that the setting value in the setting value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In this embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It will be controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability as a regular value in the set value storage area, "0". Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, the check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) is completed, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and goes to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the store clerk at the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command is transmitted, and sets the setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

The CPU 103 confirms in step S21TM4680 whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processing after step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 9-9) when the process shifts to the normal game process. The security signal will be continuously output until it becomes. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are started. Corresponding to the end of any control of the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, by standardizing the output start control and output end control of the security signal between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the output control of the security signal is simplified. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it was controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is the timing when 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the timer for game control after the interruption is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-9), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (for example). When the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (for example, in FIG. 9-9). In the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30,000 ms to 0 ms. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal timer value is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process when the setting change mode is controlled. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed or the control of the setting change mode is completed, and the control is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is the initial period. It is possible to estimate that the conversion process may have been executed and controlled to the setting change mode.

A security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-8 is not executed), so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is initially set in the signal output processing. It remains set without being converted, and it is possible to continuously output a security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-8 is executed), so that in the subsequent signal output processing. The abnormality detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether or not an abnormality was detected when the power was turned off), and as a result, the security signal output period ends the setting change mode. It is the period from when 30 seconds have elapsed (the period according to the execution of RAM clear).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (value stored in the set value storage area) as it is on the effect control CPU 120 side is an image. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the processes after step S21TM1340 shown in FIG. 9-8. Specifically, the processes of steps S21TM1340 to S21TM1370 and steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, the processes when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal at the time of turning on the power are executed, and after the interrupt is permitted, FIG. 9- It suffices to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing) shown in 9. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. A backup command is transmitted (step S21TM1370) as a command at the time of power-off recovery without executing clear, and the process proceeds to the normal game process.

In the effect control CPU 120, the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery) (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM clearing has not been performed).

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the processes after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) shown in FIG. 9-8. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) to step S21TM1460, a process for setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465), and a process from step S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, the backup RAM area when the power is turned on. The process when the data check result is abnormal may be executed, and after the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process) shown in FIG. 9-9.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag of 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol hit determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. can be used as flags for selectively processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process has been performed at the time of turning on the power (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 has initialized the game state and the like in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 (when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the data of.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the setting change mode ends is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (FIG. 9-9). The information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), and then each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal will be stopped at the timing. Then, when the process of step S21TM1465 is completed, the process proceeds to step S21TM1480.

If YES in step S21TM4770 shown in FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (processes of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. .. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in RAM 102), and step S21TM1360. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialization data for areas that may be initialized in the work area are set in the backup setting table. By the processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, restricting member state specification flag, initialized flag, etc.), output. The area where the output state of the port is saved (output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and so on. The setting value storage area (the area where the fixed setting value is stored) is also included in the part that should not be initialized. Further, an area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base is stored for each set value is also included in a portion that should not be initialized.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM1480.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 sets the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals. That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 9-9) is shifted to the normal game process that can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (ordinary symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process that controls the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one round (normal symbol hit judgment random number is taken). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery (process after step S21TM1340), but the present invention is not limited to such a form. When it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass). (Depending on the state of the door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure restoration (process after step S21TM1340).

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be performed.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). It is possible to control from S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the disconnection occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-9. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-9 is started, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 is determined via the circuit 110 (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

For example, the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown). Based on the fact that the radio wave is detected, it is determined that the game stop error has occurred.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins in any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , 2nd start port switch 22B, count switch 23, 1st general winning port switch to 4th general winning port switch When a detection signal is input, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal The prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays and monitors the winning information processing (step S21TM1640) for calculating the winning information such as the winning ratio, the continuous ratio, and the base, and the winning information such as the winning ratio, the continuous ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, the abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615, and if the abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag is set and the step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed) in S21TM1615. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) in the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B. Allows you to set the tilting motion of one piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced according to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning it off after that, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed. The set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command such as the above and transmitting the command. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute an effect suggesting a set value at various timings such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6, 9-7, and 9-8, RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, an event in which the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of starting prize before the setting change is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of order in relation to the setting value after the change. On the contrary, although it is determined to be out of order in relation to the set value before the change, an event may occur in which it is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit judgment random number extracted at the start winning prize before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process process is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the hold memory (hold memory of special symbol, hold memory of normal symbol) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of hold memory is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission of step S21TM1540 being not performed, the switch processing (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed, and the start prize is awarded. Passing through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed and the random numbers have not been updated during the period controlled by the setting change mode. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning prize during the period controlled by the setting change mode, the same random number value will be obtained regardless of the start winning timing, and the game will be played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start prize and gate passage are invalidated.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the setting value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 operation). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "The setting change mode is in progress" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be transferred to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If this is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the condition of the gaming machine, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be transferred to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" in the display monitor 21TM029) is performed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" in the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i). )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the effect control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value error error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the setting was changed, the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-12, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) to shift to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the setting is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-12, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-12, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that it is in the state and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk at the amusement park who has performed the operation to change the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode different (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned ON when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and sends a setting value error error command (to step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-12, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game field side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to surely control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-13. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode), FIG. -13 (1) will be described.

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-12 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may have been set. In this case, the clerk at the amusement park may terminate the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal gaming process, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-13 (2).

The order 1 to the order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-13 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the fixed set value.

After that, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-13 (1) and 9-13, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

In addition to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-13, the storage control of the set value may be applied. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation to end the setting change mode (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed. May be. In this case, the setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is a setting information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, it is controlled to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and even when the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is made. If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It will be a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not terminated, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided for a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to gaming machines (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

9-14 shows the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-14 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the setting change mode, and FIG. 9-14 (2) is an image display when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-14 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-14 (1), for effect control based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being changed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being changed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have changed to the setting change mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting change mode, so that the setting can be changed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-14 (1), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

If the effect control CPU 120 is not in a state where the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) when the setting change mode command is received (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying that the setting change mode has been entered from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the image display device 5 can be controlled by the display control unit 123), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM4760 in the main process. It is possible to specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode and notify the fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting change completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting change mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the user is notified that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-14 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen is transmitted on the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-14 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-14 (2), for effect control based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM4650 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being confirmed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being confirmed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have switched to the setting confirmation mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-14 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

If the effect control CPU 120 is not in a state where the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) when the setting confirmation mode command is received (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying the transition to the setting confirmation mode from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the image display device 5 can be controlled by the display control unit 123), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM4760 in the main process. It is possible to specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting confirmation mode and notify the fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting confirmation completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting confirmation mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the user is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended, so that the setting confirmation mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-14 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution), the effect control command for displaying the demo screen is transmitted on the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 9-15 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-15 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-15 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-15 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-15 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

In step S21TM4760 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, it is stored in the image display device 5 together with a character (character of "BONUS end") notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-15 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-15 (2), and FIG. 9-. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 15 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Other modified examples of the feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear), but the setting value is not limited to such a form. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the operation can be detected by the game control microcomputer 100), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is compared with the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when changing the set value, the confirmation of the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value become easy, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game information such as the base is displayed is shown. Not limited to such a form, it is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total game status, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. With such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped individually and more clearly, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

Further, a configuration may be provided in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example,). (Change every 5 seconds in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be fixed by overwriting with the set value. The clerk at the game hall switched the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed was displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and was displayed at that time. It is possible to determine the set value as the set value of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to an upper plate or a lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It may be an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium is enclosed in the gaming machine and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. In this enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value. Information indicating that an operation for changing the above has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer, and it may be possible to specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in the hall computer. ..

In the above embodiment, the period is controlled by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, the setting change mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special are based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. may be used to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode may be used. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 and the like notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (for example, 7). The segment display may be made to emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is instructed to display the number of rounds during the big hit game (round number display) and to instruct the player to launch the game ball into a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these displays indicate that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. It may be made to emit light according to the embodiment.

In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security is secured. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off, but the setting change mode is not limited to such a form. Or, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Accordingly, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that RAM clear is executed. It becomes possible to specify.

Regarding the expectation degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is determined according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the jackpot expectation degree. The selection ratio of) may be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation is low, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, in the case of 5 or 6), when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, in the case of 5 or 6). It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2). With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expected degree suggestion effect with a number of black stars of 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low expectation of a big hit, the player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it can be expected that the set value is high, it is possible to improve the interest even when the jackpot expectation is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player to play a game. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by a player (for example, big). The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms of the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the game machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each have a hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in the direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side to the outer frame is provided.

Further, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that serves as an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape through which the center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The gaming board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L, 8R, a gaming effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a protects the surface of the game board and is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window in which the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

When the store clerk of the game hall performs maintenance on the surface of the game board (for example, measures to clear the ball jam), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating it toward the front side like a door with the mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. In order for the clerk of the game hall to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the game machine frame 3 from the closed state where the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

When the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a detection signal capable of identifying that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state. Is output, and when the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can identify that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized separately.

[Explanation of feature section 30TM]
Next, the feature unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 30TM001) and the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold) are displayed. A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display are provided. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen, with the active display area 30TM103 in the center and the left side when viewed from the player is the first reserved display area 30TM101. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

When the first reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 in the first reserved display area 30TM101 in a number corresponding to the first reserved storage number. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

Further, when the second hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second hold display 30TM002 in the second hold display area 30TM102 in a number corresponding to the second hold storage number. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, winning the second start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the second special symbol for which the second special symbol (and the number of reserved storages is not 0) is not established. When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the left when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

Further, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and the first hold storage number (0 to 4 sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The sub-holding display area 30TM104 to be displayed and the sub-active display area 30TM105 which is different from the active display area 30TM103 and displays the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

In the present embodiment, based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display 30TM004 at the time of start winning (when a prize is generated to the first start winning opening), the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is designated. The sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the number of 1-hold storage is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0) is not established. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied. It is the information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved stored number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-holding displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-holding display 30TM004 is in the order closer to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is a star-shaped contour, which is different from the first hold display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller than that of the first hold display 30TM001, it is less noticeable and less visible to the player. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped contour, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller than that of the active display 30TM003, it is inconspicuous and has low visibility for the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active is displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the left middle right decorative pattern being executed in the image display device 5. The subactive display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. As described above, as the information corresponding to the variable display (common variable display) of 1 being executed, information in different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the common variable display are displayed on the screen at the same time.

Further, corresponding to the case where the number of first reserved storages is 4, four first reserved displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101, and four secondary reserved displays are displayed in the secondary reserved display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, information in different modes such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the first hold display 30TM001 of 1 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 of 1 corresponding to the variable display (holding storage) corresponding to the first holding display 30TM001 and the common variable display (holding storage) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common variation display (variation display of the first special symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. It is possible to diversify the production using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, multiple types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the running variation display (variation display of the first special symbol, variation display of the decorative symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production using the active display and improve the interest.

Here, as will be described later, when it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the time of starting winning, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, while the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105, and further indicates that the sub-active display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. The information (square frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 10-1) will not be displayed either.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white circle display). (White triangle display in this example), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) Display) or a notice effect to be displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star-shaped display) of the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. It is a notice effect to be displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star shape display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star shape display).

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first start winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new command (1 hold storage number addition designation command) has been received (step S30TM1010).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of big hit. Based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a big hit will occur and the big hit type in the case of a big hit, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command indicating the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and first hold storage number addition designation commands) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. do. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the determination that at least the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 10-3) (step S30TM1030).

By executing the processes of steps S30TM1010 and S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processes after step S30TM1030 are executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured so that the second change effect can be executed.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a "normal mode", a "special mode", a "blue mode", a "green mode", and a "red mode". It is possible to determine either "golden mode" or "golden mode", and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is "no display", "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". Any of these can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Of these, "no display" means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white circle display) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), 18% of the blue mode (blue circle display), 21% of the green mode (green circle display), and 16% of the red mode (red circle display). ), And it becomes a golden mode (golden circle display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69. Will be executed at a rate of%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold storage). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 25%, it becomes a red aspect, and at a rate of 35%, it becomes a golden aspect. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), with respect to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. ..

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003. May be. When the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when it is displayed as the active display 30TM003), the display mode is at least the same as or higher than that before the active shift. It is supposed to change to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation of a big hit is in the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the ratio of selecting the special mode as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio of selecting the other modes. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5 described later, the ratio of the change pattern of the hold display including the special aspect is not so low as compared with the ratio including the other aspects. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the display mode changes at a higher rate than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher degree of expectation. It can be expected to change to the display mode (blue mode, red mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the relevant case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70%, but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The ratio that the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio of the final display mode to the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the judgment target at the start winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that was the judgment target at the starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 5%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the relevant case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40%, but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The ratio that the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio of the final display mode to the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the judgment target at the start winning is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that was the judgment target at the starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 50%.

As described above, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of a normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode becomes a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub hold display 30TM004 prior to the sub active display 30TM005. There is. When the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when it is displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), the display mode is at least the same as before the active shift, or a display with a higher expectation. It is designed to change to a mode. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation of a big hit is in the relationship of the normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is different from the normal mode), and the second It may be decided to execute the change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and may decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided to be an embodiment).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a normal mode), and executes the second change effect (secondary hold display 30TM004 and). It may be determined that the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute (4-1) the first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided to be an embodiment).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute either the first change effect or the second change effect in the process of step S30TM1030 (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any of 4-2) is applicable, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, this The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the above does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (change patterns 101, 201, when the final display mode is the "normal mode" shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5. (See 301, 401).

If the above (4-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 10-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1) and (2). -2) If any of (3) and (3) is applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

When it is decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is applicable, in step S30TM1060, the first updated first. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the hold storage number (the first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 (the change pattern of the first change effect). (See FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5), the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command), and the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode of (see FIG. 10-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in the above (2-1) and (2-2). If any of these cases apply, in step S30TM1120, the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5). If the above (2-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 10-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, when the above (3) is applicable, the step In S30TM1210, the second is based on the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 10-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3)). If this is the case), the look-ahead counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In addition, when neither the first change effect nor the second change effect notice effect is executed, but the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed ((4-2) above). Also set the look-ahead counter (if applicable).

The read-ahead counter is set to the value corresponding to the first reserved storage number updated based on the start winning (value specified by the first reserved storage number specification command), and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by 1 each time (every time the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received). That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is subtracted each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variation display (or the second change effect is not executed but the sub-hold display 30TM004) that is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect is displayed. Variable display) will be executed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold storage) by determining YES in step S30TM1020 described above. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display targeted for the first change effect ends.

10-4 and 10-5 are explanatory views showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the first change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the nth first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (timing at the time of start winning), (ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (Timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning is displayed). ), The display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It shows whether it becomes a display mode. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white circle is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangle is displayed. "Blue" indicates a blue mode that is a blue circle display, and "red" indicates a red mode that is a red circle display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 101 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, the active shift means that the first hold display area 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display that is the judgment target is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 103 is. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 does not change in the special mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is a change pattern 105. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special aspect to the blue aspect after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains in the blue mode and does not change.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the green mode after the active shift. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the green mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 107 is a change pattern 107. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special aspect to the red aspect after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

Here, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal aspect to the golden aspect. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special aspect to the golden aspect after the active shift. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue aspect to the golden aspect. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the red mode to the golden mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 10-4 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 201, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode even at the timing.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is special even at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. The change pattern 205 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the change pattern 206 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. 1 After displaying the hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and in the change pattern 208, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode, and the change pattern 210 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 1 After displaying the hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 10-5 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, there is a 100% probability that the change pattern 301 will change regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 301 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and is the second time. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the 302. The change pattern 302 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. The change pattern 303 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of, but changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the blue mode and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the mode, the first hold display to be announced remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display to be announced remains in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode and changes the first hold display to be announced to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 309 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the start winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the active shift. However, it is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. Does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode, does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 10-5 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, there is a 100% probability that the change pattern 401 will change regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 401 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold display is not changed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, even at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the 402s. The change pattern 402 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice target is also made at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the above in a special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. The change pattern 403 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is the change pattern 404, which displays the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display to be announced at the timing of the first hold shift. 1 The hold display is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is made even at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, but the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 is a change pattern 406 that displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the first hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing it as it is, and the change pattern 407 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and the third hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the blue mode, the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the notice is given at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the target to the red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the red mode, and the change pattern 410 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The display changes in blue mode Instead, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode even at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and in the change pattern 411, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the start winning prize. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be announced in the red mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the hold display is displayed in the red mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, change pattern 410, change pattern 411, and change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the second change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is decided to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i). ) The 1st to nth sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is sub. The timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning position has a higher position in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (secondary active display area 30TM105). Timing to shift to (side) (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing to shift the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start prize to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (sub-active display corresponding to the start prize). At the timing when 30TM005 is displayed), the display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIG. 10-6, what kind of display mode the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display becomes at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIGS. 10-6, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white star is displayed, and "blue" indicates a blue mode in which a blue star is displayed. "Red" indicates a red aspect, which is a red star-shaped display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 10-6 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIG. 10-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display area 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the change that is the determination target at the time of starting winning). The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 603 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 605 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal aspect to the red aspect. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704 described later, change patterns 802 to 804, change pattern 902). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708 described later, change patterns 805 to 808, change pattern 906). In the case of ~ 912), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 10-6 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 701 does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and also at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display to be announced in the normal mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode, and the change pattern 703 is a change pattern of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift after displaying with.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708, respectively. In the change pattern 705, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the above to the red mode, and the change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode and changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 708 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. ..

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 10-6 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 801 does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of, and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 802 to the change pattern 804. The change pattern 802 does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after displaying the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display to be announced in the blue mode.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern 802 are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 changes the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 807 is the first time after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The pattern 808 does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of the start winning. It is a change pattern.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 10-6 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, there is a 100% probability that the change pattern 901 will change regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-hold display to be announced in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the sub-hold display to be announced at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 902 to the change pattern 905. In the change pattern 902, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third time. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift of, and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be announced is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is set at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the above in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the first, second, and third hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the timing and the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the missed or the big hit), And, the determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 906 to the change pattern 912. The change pattern 906 does not change the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and in the change pattern 907, the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, but at the timing of the third hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 908 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice target is changed at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display in the red mode, and the change pattern 909 displays the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the notice target at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. The sub-hold display of is not changed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 910 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. Instead, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 911 is a pattern, in which the sub-hold display to be announced is displayed in blue at the start winning, and then the sub-hold display to be announced is displayed in red at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes to the mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be announced is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the rate at which the first change effect of displaying the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect of displaying is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

In this way, at the lower part of the screen, the player for the advance notice effect by frequently executing the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility. Can sustain your interest. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, which have low visibility, the percentage of big hits differs depending on whether or not they are displayed at the upper part of the screen. Attention will be paid to whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Further, since the jackpot expectation when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, whether or not the display mode changes when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Will also pay attention to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the lower part of the screen and a star-shaped icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive) displayed at the upper part of the screen are displayed. The size and shape are different from the display 30TM005). That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed as a circle, and the other icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive display 30TM005) is displayed as a star. By doing so, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily understand the difference (different types of display information). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production of icons corresponding to the variable display.

In addition, a common display color corresponding to a common variable display, such as the relationship between the first hold display 30TM001 in the red mode displayed at the bottom of the screen and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode displayed at the top of the screen. Icons (however, the shapes are different for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variation display.

In addition, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display during execution, such as the relationship between the red-shaped active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-shaped subactive display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen. (However, the shapes are different for round and star icons) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, the red aspect). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the red mode has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both hold display modes and displays the hold display. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red mode). The combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both active display modes, and enhances the interest of the production that changes the display mode of the active display. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the first change effect is displayed. (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the subactive display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is when changing the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. It is provided more than the change pattern of. In this way, by differentiating the types and patterns of the effects that can be executed according to the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second change effect and the second effect are prevented from being excessively complicated. We are trying to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9. 10-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 at the time of execution.

First, FIG. 10-8 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-7 by displaying the variation of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-7), a new prize is won while the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (golden mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target. , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect, and also displays the sub-active display 30TM005. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the fact that the number of first hold storages is 4, four sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (T2) and 10-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. However, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 which is the target of the second change effect is displayed). From), the period until the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is completed (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIGS. 10-7).

As a result, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold display of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-7). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased. , The sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-7). Then, the first hold display to be announced is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (5), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1. The sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-7). Then, the first hold display to be announced is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue circle display), and the first hold display is changed based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. The sub-holding display to be announced is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004b which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (7), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode and the blue mode) is displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display)) is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-7). Then, the first hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display), and the change pattern 906 of the second change effect is used. The sub-holding display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (9), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed on the sub-active display area 30TM005 is erased, and the sub-holding display (sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in red mode) displayed on the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is changed to the sub-active display area 30TM105. The shift display is performed, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 10-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103. The change pattern that changes the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10-16. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period shown in FIGS. 10-7 from T7 to T8. Change to the aspect. For example, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 determined at the time of starting winning is the red mode and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the blue mode immediately after the shift display, the variation display of the advance notice target is displayed. The subactive display 30TM005 is changed from a blue mode to a red mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 10-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from being lowered and the interest from being lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the advance notice is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 10-7).

As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which share at least a part of the display area with the area where the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display, which are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, can be continuously displayed at the upper part of the screen even during the period when the reach effect is executed. , The player can see these. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of reserved memories even during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-10 to 10-12. 10-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a production image.

First, FIG. 10-11 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-10 by displaying the variation of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-10), a new prize is won while the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (golden mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target. , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (T2) and 10-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. However, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is from the time when the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the end of the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 10-10) is used.

As a result, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold display of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, if a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is subject to advance notice by the first change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-10). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-10). Then, the first hold display to be announced is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (5), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the image display device. In 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be announced is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue circle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (7), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the image display device. At 5, the next variable display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-10). Then, the first hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red circle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (9), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the following fluctuations are made in the image display device 5. Start displaying.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 10-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 10-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the advance notice is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 10-10).

As shown above, if it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of the start prize, a new start prize will be awarded until the variation display that is the target of the first change effect is completed. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start prize is not executed either. In this way, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is once changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 with high visibility (after changing to a mode different from the normal mode), a new start prize is subsequently generated. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start prize in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player can pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. (1) It is designed to prevent complication of the effect due to the execution of the second change effect for the variable display different from the variable display which is the target of the change effect.

In the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is given. An example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). If a new start prize is generated during the period displayed in a different mode), the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but at that time. The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

Further, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), other notices are not limited to the second change effect. The execution of the production may be restricted. For example, the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display based on the new start prize is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 each time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect (displayed as "3", "2", "1", "0") by subtracting one by one. In addition, the background change effect that changes the background image to a special mode may not be executed until the variation display based on the new start prize is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is given. An example of prohibiting the execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually used). If a new start prize is generated during the period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize is feasible, but the new start prize is supported. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 itself corresponding to the new start prize is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is displayed but its display mode is normal. It may not be changed as it is.

(Modification example related to the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and acts on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-holding action effect.

10-13, 10-14, and 10-15 are specific examples of the case where the first holding action effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-holding action effect is executed in the second change effect.

First, FIG. 10-13 (1) shows a state in which the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right while the first reserved storage number is 3. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, a new start winning is generated for the winning ball device 6A. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode (golden mode in this example) of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target. , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect, and also displays the sub-active display 30TM005. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the number of first hold storages is 4, four sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 are displayed. The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a), which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the character A appears and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 specializes the first hold display to be notified from the normal mode in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode is changed (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangular display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and 30TM001a in the first hold display in the special mode) is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 one by one. Then, the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (a blue mode). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b), which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-holding display to be announced is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13 (7), the character B appears and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be announced, the player can be expected to change the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in blue from a special aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect B). The mode is changed (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display).

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 10-14 (9), the character a appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 to be announced is executed. As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (10) and 10-15 (11), the balloon flew by the character a flies toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004. It is possible to expect the player to change the aspect of the sub-holding display 30TM004 by displaying the image to be displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (11) and 10-14 (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (13) and (14), the effect control CPU 120 normally displays the sub-holding display to be notified in response to the execution of the sub-holding action effect (action effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (15), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The active display 30TM005 is erased, and the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode and the sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display) in the blue mode) is displayed. )) Are shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the first hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode during the execution of the variation display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c), which is a red circle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the display is changed to the sub-hold display 30TM004c), which is a red star-shaped display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15 (17), the character C appears, and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001b to be announced is executed. It is possible to expect the player to change the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001b by displaying the image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be announced in red from the blue aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red circle display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15 (19), the character b appears, and the effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b to be announced is executed. As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (20) and 10-15 (21), the balloons blown by the character b fly toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reach the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. It is possible to expect the player to change the aspect of the sub-holding display 30TM004b by displaying the image to be displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (21) and 10-15 (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image in which the balloon is broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in blue in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect b). To red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). ..

As described above, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when the mode of the first hold display is changed and the sub-hold action effect executed when the mode of the sub-hold display is changed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the existence of a plurality of types of hold correspondence displays (first hold display and sub-hold display).

As shown in FIGS. 10-13 to 10-15, the effect of the character appearing and performing an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the execution of the active action effect in which the character A appears and throws a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The aspect may be changed from the normal aspect to another aspect (special aspect, blue aspect, green aspect, red aspect, golden aspect). Further, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect is executed in response to the appearance of the character a and the action of flying a balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, there are a plurality of types due to the difference in the effect mode between the active action effect executed when the mode of the active display is changed and the sub-active action effect executed when the mode of the sub-active display is changed. It is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of the variable display (active display and sub-active display).

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution rate of the second change effect may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the ratio of the first hold display 30TM001 being displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Further, the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself displayed) may be high. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, 3 times) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). ) The rate at which the change pattern is selected is high, and the rate at which the change pattern with a large number of changes in the display color of the sub-holding display 30TM004 (for example, twice) is selected may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated, but as described above, the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility of change. This change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed and the failure mode is changed. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed.

The effect control CPU 120 is different from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined when the start prize is generated when the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display is performed. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variation display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variation display.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern that changes the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode when the variable display is started. FIG. 10-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to each of the special aspect, the blue aspect, the green aspect, the red aspect, and the gold aspect as the final display aspect of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIG. 10-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

When the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is a special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two times, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 011 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode.

When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and then the change of the success mode is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the active display to a blue mode by executing a suggestion effect.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 014 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode. It is a change pattern, and the change pattern 015 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the special mode, and then changes the change suggestion effect of the success mode. Is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. It is a change pattern that changes to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 016 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 017 is a change suggestion effect of the success mode after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, then execute a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a success mode change suggestion effect to turn the active display green. A change pattern in which the mode is changed, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode. Is.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is 5, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 018 is active by displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 10-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the blue mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 021, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after displaying the active display in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the green mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and then the change of the success mode is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the active display to a green mode by executing a suggestion effect.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 024 displays the active display in a special mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the blue mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be active. The display is changed to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern, in which the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed. Is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. Is a change pattern that changes the red color.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is 4, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 10-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 031, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 031 displays the active display in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the green mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 032 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the green mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the green mode, and then the change of the success mode is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the active display to a red mode by executing a suggestion effect.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is 3, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 034 displays the active display in the blue mode at the time of the active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the green mode, and then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 10-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed once in the change pattern 041, of which the success mode is 1 time and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10-16, within one variation display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach is reached after the variation display is started. The more change suggestion effects are executed (within the period until the state is established), and in particular, the more success mode change suggestion effects are executed, the higher the expectation of a big hit will be. The ratio will be high.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the nth change suggestion effect is executed, the higher the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode up to that point, the higher the ratio of the n + 1th change suggestion effect being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n = 2), if both times are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n = 3 and the case of n = 4. In this way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the period from the start of the variation display to the establishment of the reach state, the same variation. Since the ratio of the next change suggestion effect being executed within the display period (the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state) is high, the player can execute the change suggestion effect the number of times, especially the success mode. It will be possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] in 1 variation display period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The rate of change to a high-degree display mode is high. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is a special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If it becomes, it is 5/5. In this way, the larger the [number of times the success suggestion effect is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed], the higher the rate at which the active display changes to the display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Also pays attention to the relationship between the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, which can improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the more times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode with high expectation of big hit. Specifically, the number of consecutive change suggestion effects of the success mode is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and when the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times in succession.

Further, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern having a larger number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the rate of selection of the change pattern 012 (2 consecutive) is higher than that of the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the case of the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (2 consecutive). The rate of selection of 014 (3 consecutive) is higher, and in the case of the red aspect, the rate of selection of change pattern 016 (4 consecutive) is higher than that of change pattern 017 (3 consecutive). In this way, even if the display color is the same in the end, the player's expectation can be further increased by making it easy for the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be continuous.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect based on the change pattern shown in FIG. 10-16 determined at the time of starting winning. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed. decide. The types of change suggestion effects include change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character. There is a change suggestion effect E, in which E appears.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 10-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect is executed the n + 1th time. Select the table of "Success mode, next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Success mode, next effect execution], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed the n + 1th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning. Select the table of "Success mode, no next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect executed the n + 1th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning. Select the table of "Failure mode, next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, next effect execution], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect executed at the n + 1th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning. Select the table of [Failure mode, no next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 10-17. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the n + 1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the same character A appears at the nth time is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a successful mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In that case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the change suggestion effect this time is the last).

In this way, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high expectation of big hits differs depending on the type of character appearing in the production, so the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

It should be noted that the effect type is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 10-17, and for example, an effect type may be provided in which the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is low and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also low. It is also possible to provide an effect type in which the display mode of the display changes at a high rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-18 to 10-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 10-18, 10-19 (9) to (12), and 10-20, it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the gold mode when the start prize is won. This is an example of the case where it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 018. .. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the final display mode in green when the start prize is won. An example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. Is.

In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect D of the success mode based on the determination and the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect, and the character E appears for the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it has been decided to execute the change suggestion effect E.

In FIG. 10-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left middle right decorative pattern. It shows the state of being.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A of the success mode according to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (1), a character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, followed by FIG. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (3), the active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) of a special aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B of the success mode according to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, followed by FIG. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003a of the special aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (6), the active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in the blue aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect C of the success mode according to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed, followed by a production image. As shown in FIG. 10-18 (8), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003b in the blue aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (9), the active display 30TM003d (green circle display) in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect. Green.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the success mode according to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (11), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (12), the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect E of the success mode according to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the range of the crack is expanded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (15), an image (screen crack image 30TM210) in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (16), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003c in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (17), the active display 30TM003e (golden circle display) of the golden aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fifth change suggestion effect. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are erased. A reach state is established in which the same decorative pattern ("7" in this example) is stopped in the display area, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The production is executed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the active display 30TM003e in the golden aspect is hidden, and the square frame showing the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 10-18 and 10-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to the green mode when the start prize is won. This is an example of the case where it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. ..

In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the decision is made and that the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode is executed based on the fact that the fifth change suggestion effect is not executed.

Since the effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) to 10-19 (9) are the same as the above-mentioned effect example of the change pattern 018, they will be described. Will be omitted, and examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 10-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode according to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (20), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D did not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-mentioned effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and the character D throws and does not hit instead. An effect image is displayed in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (22), a reach state is established in which the same decorative symbol (“4” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and “reach !! The character "" is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103), and the reach effect is executed. Here, since the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established as described above, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) to 10-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the image display device 5 is continuously executing the variable display of the left middle right decorative pattern. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and the reach state is established. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, changes the direction of the variable display, and changes the reach state. It doesn't hold. According to such a configuration, the mode of the variation display of the decorative pattern does not change during the period in which the change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, so that the change suggestion effect can be further noticed.

Although FIG. 10-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous, the change pattern is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. .. Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed twice in succession after the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed three times in succession. Further, although the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed once or more, the effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, and the active display is always displayed when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. An example in which the display mode changes is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, it is active at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes. For example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided, and the change of the failure mode may be provided. Even when the suggestion effect is executed, an effect pattern that changes the display mode of the active display may be provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode in which the expectation of big hit is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a golden mode) has been shown. May provide a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes from a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is two or more steps higher (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a golden mode, etc.). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of the character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears. When is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is high. Is also good. Further, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages without fail.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at the timing before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation that revariates after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is executed one or more times, before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (a total of n times of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed), and then. By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the n + 1th temporary stop is not executed. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed even once, the effect pattern in which only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. Further, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously performed n + 1 times. An effect pattern may be provided that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode.

In such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started (character appears) when the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped, and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Takes an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and takes an action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed for the first time. After the re-variation of is started, character B appears and takes an action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode, and then a second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by making sure that the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period for changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) do not overlap, the change suggestion effect can be focused on. At the same time, it is possible not to reduce the effect of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped.

In addition, when executing the effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative symbol from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the vertical direction (character appears). , It is preferable to end the change suggestion effect (the character takes an action to change the display mode of the active display) before changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the first character appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative symbol changes from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect from overlapping with the timing at which the change display direction of the decorative symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be focused on and the change display of the decorative symbol can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the direction changes from being reduced.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the change suggestion effect is a display mode of the hold display. May be a production that suggests that For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 10-16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. , When the effect of suggesting a change in the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

In the above embodiment, in both the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character acts on the same action (active display or hold display, for example, a ball). The example of performing the action of throwing) is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In the failure suggestion effect, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. It should be noted that the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode. For example, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the active display or the hold display to be changed may be displayed. In the action of throwing the ball in the direction of (active display or hold display), and in the failure mode change suggestion effect, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or hold display (active display or hold display). You may try to perform a production that does not work).

In the above embodiment, the larger the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the next change suggestion effect is performed within the predetermined period. The higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the expectation of big hit is shown. .. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-ream pattern in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop). It may be a period, or it may be a period from the temporary suspension of the decorative symbol to the temporary suspension of the decorative symbol after the re-variation of the decorative symbol (that is, the period between the pseudo-reams). The predetermined period may be a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right, and all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. It may be a period until the definite stop.

In the above embodiment, when the change suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of patterns may exist from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the ratio of the next change suggestion effect to the success mode is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree. May be high. Further, when the change suggestion effect is executed many times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the expectation of big hit may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of 1 is completed, the player determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed, and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interests.

In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the ratio of the active display display mode being different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do so. In addition, the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, 3 times or more) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The rate at which the pattern is selected may be high, that is, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, the effect where the character X with a low appearance frequency appears) is higher than the case where the set value is low (1 to 3). May be made to be executed at a higher rate.

[Explanation of feature section 04TM]
Next, the feature unit 04TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-20.

First, the operation unit in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-5. FIG. 11-1 is a plan view showing the operation unit in the present embodiment, and shows the operation unit when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the upper side to the lower side. FIG. 11-2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 11-1, which is a view when the split hemisphere, which will be described later, is in a fully closed state. 11-3 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 11-2. As shown in FIG. 11-1, a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 04TM111 for supplying a game ball is formed in the lower housing 04TM101 arranged below the gaming machine.

An operation unit is provided on the player side of the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 04TM111, and the operation unit includes a hemispherical spherical button 04TM102A and a disk-shaped push button 04TM102B. When the effect control CPU 120 detects that the spherical button 04TM102A has been operated, it can execute the result notification effect described later as an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A, and detects that the push button 04TM102B has been operated. Then, a cut-in notice effect, which will be described later, can be executed as an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the push button 04TM102B.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a spherical button 04TM102A formed of a transparent synthetic resin is installed on the player side (front side) of the ball hitting plate 04TM111. The spherical button 04TM102A is hollow, and as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, a hemispherical portion 04TM121 is formed in the upper portion, and a cylindrical portion 04TM122 is formed in the lower portion. A cylindrical guide hole 04TM112 is formed in the lower housing 04TM101, and a spherical button 04TM102A is movably inserted into the guide hole 04TM112 in the vertical direction of FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, and a spring (compression spring) 04TM123 is inserted. Is constantly being urged upwards. When the player presses the spherical button 04TM102A, the spring 04TM123 is compressed, the spherical button 04TM102A moves downward in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, and the proximity switch 04TM124 is activated.

The effect control CPU 120 displays any one of the states in which the predetermined conditions are satisfied (special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and third special operation promotion display 04TM035C). When it is detected that the proximity switch 04TM124 is activated in response to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A, the result notification effect is executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a push sensor (similar to the above-mentioned push sensor 35B) that the push button 04TM102B is operated in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied (a state in which the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed). Is detected, a cut-in notice effect is executed.

A spherical light emitter 04TM103 is arranged at the axis of the hemispherical portion 04TM121 of the spherical button 04TM102A. The light emitter 04TM103 is, for example, an LED bulb that emits white light. Rotating shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 that pass through the axis of the light emitter 04TM103 are integrally formed on both sides of the outer periphery of the light emitter 04TM103 that face each other. The rotary shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 are rotatably supported by the ribs 04TM113 and 04TM114 of the lower housing 04TM101, respectively. The ribs 04TM113 and 04TM114 are formed on the lower housing 04TM101 in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 11-2. A gear 04TM133 is fixed to the right end of the right rotary shaft 04TM132. The gear 04TM135 fixed to the output shaft of the rotary motor 04TM134 attached to the rib 04TM114 on the right side meshes with the gear 04TM133. The effect control CPU 120 rotates the rotation motor 04TM134. When the rotation motor 04TM134 rotates and the rotation shaft 04TM132 rotates, the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131 rotate at the same time.

The outer circumference of the illuminant 04TM103 is covered with a pair of split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B. The split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are molded from a translucent and colored (for example, red) synthetic resin. The split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B can be opened and closed in the left-right direction of FIG. 11-2, and complementary knurls are formed at the joints. Cylindrical rotary sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B are integrally fixed to the axial centers of the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B, respectively. The left rotary sleeve 04TM142A is externally fitted to the left rotary shaft 04TM131 so as to be movable in the left-right direction of FIG. 11-2, and the right rotary sleeve 04TM142B is movable to the right rotary shaft 04TM132 in the left-right direction of FIG. 11-2. It fits outside. Further, the keys 04TM143A and 04TM143B are fixed to the rotating shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132, respectively, and the keys 04TM143A and 04TM143B are slidably fitted to the key grooves 04TM144A and 04TM144B formed in the rotating sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B, respectively. Therefore, when the rotation shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 rotate, the rotation sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B rotate.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, long grooves 04TM125A and 04TM125B are formed on the left and right sides of FIG. 11-2 in the cylindrical portion 04TM122 of the spherical button 04TM102A. The long grooves 04TM125A and 04TM125B are formed long in the vertical direction in FIG. 11-3. The rotary shaft 04TM131 and the rotary sleeve 04TM142A are arranged so as to extend to the left in FIG. 11-2 through the long groove 04TM125A on the left side. Similarly, the rotary shaft 04TM132 and the rotary sleeve 04TM142B are arranged so as to extend to the right in FIG. 11-2 through the long groove 04TM125B on the right side. Therefore, the spherical button 04TM102A can be operated up and down without interfering with the rotary sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B.

In the lower housing 04TM101, ribs 04TM115 and 04TM116 are formed below the rotation shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 in the left-right direction of FIG. 11-2. The guide blocks 04TM145A and 04TM145B are fixed to the ribs 04TM115 and 04TM116. Guide grooves 04TM146A and 04TM146B are formed on the upper surfaces of the guide blocks 04TM145A and 04TM145B, and the lower ends of the nuts 04TM147A and 04TM147B are guided by the guide grooves 04TM146A and 04TM146B so that they can move in the left-right direction in FIG. 11-2. The upper ends of the nuts 04TM147A and 04TM147B are fitted to the annular grooves 04TM148A and 04TM148B formed on the outer periphery of the rotary sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B, respectively. Lead screws 04TM149A and 04TM149B are screwed into the female threads formed on the nuts 04TM147A and 04TM147B. A gear 04TM151A is fixed to the left end of the left feed screw 04TM149A. The gear 04TM153A fixed to the output shaft of the opening / closing motor 04TM152A attached to the rib 04TM115 on the left side meshes with the gear 04TM151A. Similarly, the gear 04TM151B is fixed to the right end of the feed screw 04TM149B on the right side. The gear 04TM153B fixed to the output shaft of the opening / closing motor 04TM152B attached to the rib 04TM116 on the right side meshes with the gear 04TM151B.

When the player presses the spherical button 04TM102A to activate the proximity switch 04TM124, the effect control CPU 120 causes the light emitter 04TM103 to emit light and rotates the opening / closing motors 04TM152A and 04TM152B. When the opening / closing motors 04TM152A and 04TM152B rotate, the feed screw 04TM149A and 04TM149B rotate, the left nut 04TM147A moves to the left in FIG. 11-2, and the rotary sleeve 04TM142A moves to the left in FIG. 11-2. .. Further, the nut 04TM147B on the right side moves to the right in FIG. 11-2, and the rotary sleeve 04TM142B moves to the right in FIG. 11-2. As a result, the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B start the opening operation from the fully closed state of FIG. 11-2, and can arbitrarily change the opening state to the fully opened state of FIG. 11-4.

FIG. 11-5 is an operation explanatory diagram showing changes in the open state of the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B. As shown in FIG. 5, the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B arbitrarily change the open state from the fully closed state of (a) to the intermediate open state of (b) and (c) and the fully open state of (d). Further, it is possible to rotate the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B and the illuminant 04TM103 in an arbitrary open state. As a result, the white light of the illuminant 04TM103 emitted from the jagged openings of the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B and the red light emitted from the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B fluctuate irregularly, thereby improving the effect on the player. It will be possible to make it.

In the example described below, the case where the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are in the fully closed state is the normal mode of the spherical button 04TM102A, and the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are open but the opening degree is the smallest (the crack width is the minimum). (When) is the first special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A, and when the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are open and the opening concrete is medium (the crack width is larger than the first special mode and smaller than the third special mode). When) is the second special aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A, and when the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are open and the opening degree is the largest (when the crack width is maximum), the third special aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A is used. It is supposed to be.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the hold display and the operation-related display. A hold display area 04TM004 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 hold displays 04TM002) is provided at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, and a sphere is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. A special effect area 04TM003 for displaying the operation-related display 04TM001 composed of images is provided.

When the first reserved storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reserved display 04TM002 in the reserved display area 04TM004 in a number corresponding to the first reserved storage number. That is, in the hold display 04TM002, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the big hit game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. ..

Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a special effect area 04TM003 that displays the operation-related display 04TM001, which is an area different from the hold display area 04TM004, is provided. In the hold display area 04TM004, the start condition is satisfied first from the hold display 04TM002 which is closer to the special production area 04TM003, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display 04TM002 is executed in order from the left when viewed from the player. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode (round shape), a first specific mode (hammer shape), and a second specific mode (sword shape). Each of the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side by one at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, of the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004, the hold display 04TM002 displayed at the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 (far left) is the timing (hold) shifted to the special effect area 04TM003. It is erased (hidden) when the display 04TM002 and the operation-related display 04TM001 overlap each other). Therefore, it appears to the player as if the hold display 04TM002 was absorbed by the operation-related display 04TM001 and disappeared.

The operation-related display 04TM001 is composed of an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A, is information related to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A, and is an operation effect executed in response to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A (result notification described later). It is also information related to production). The operation-related display 04TM001 in the present embodiment is a period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (a period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and a period during which the special symbol is fixedly stopped (the decorative symbol is). Information that can be displayed in any period of the fixed suspension period). It is also displayed even when the number of reserved storages is 0.

In the present embodiment, as the operation effect executed in response to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A, the combination of the decorative symbols whose display result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, and the ally character wins the enemy character, or the display. The combination of decorative symbols whose result is out of order is stopped and displayed, and one of the defeat effects in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. The victory effect and the defeat effect may be collectively referred to as a result notification effect.

The operation-related display 04TM001 is information that can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and regardless of the number of reserved storages. However, the information (so-called active display) corresponding to the executed variation display (variation display in which the start condition is satisfied) may be obtained. Specifically, when the operation-related display 04TM001 is displayed in the normal mode, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is being executed by itself, but the hold display 04TM002 is special when the variable display is started. It is possible to grasp the period from the timing shifted to the effect area 04TM003 (the timing when the hold display 04TM002 and the operation-related display 04TM001 overlap) to the end of the variation display as the period during which the variation display is executed. Therefore, the operation-related display 04TM001 in the normal mode during this period corresponds to the information (so-called active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Further, when the operation-related display 04TM001 is displayed in a special mode different from the normal mode (any of the first special mode, the second special mode, and the third special mode), only the operation-related display 04TM001 of the special mode is displayed. By, the player can grasp at least that the variable display is executed. Therefore, the operation-related display 04TM001 of the special aspect corresponds to the information (so-called active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed.

In the present embodiment, the operation-related display 04TM001 can be displayed in the low base state, and is not displayed in the high base state and the big hit game state. In addition, the operation-related display 04TM001 is not displayed during the display of the demo screen that is displayed when the period during which the game ball does not win in any of the winning areas reaches a predetermined period in the low base state, and it is difficult to see. It may be hidden during the execution of a specific effect such as (so-called blackout effect).

In this way, when the variable display is executed, the operation-related display may play a role as an active display (information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol), but when the variable display is not executed. However, by displaying the motion-related display, the presence can be emphasized as an object different from the active display, and the player can pay attention to the motion-related display regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed.

The display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is a normal mode in which the sphere has no cracks, a first special mode in which the sphere has small cracks [crack (small)], and a medium mode in the sphere (first special mode). The second special mode [crack (medium)] containing cracks (larger than the cracks of the second special mode) and the third special mode [cracking (large)] containing large cracks in the sphere. There is. The display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 changes according to the execution of the change suggestion effect described later.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-6, when the decorative symbol variation display is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the special effect area 04TM003 is normally displayed. The operation-related display 04TM001 of the embodiment is displayed. Further, in correspondence with the first reserved storage number being 2, the reserved display area 04TM004 is reserved in the normal mode (round shape) in the order closer to the special effect area 04TM003 (from the left when viewed from the player). Display 04TM002 and the second specific mode (sword-shaped) hold display are displayed.

The hold display 04TM002 in the first specific mode (hammer type) and the hold display 04TM002 in the second specific mode (sword shape) are more conspicuous because they are larger in size than the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode (round shape). , The visibility is high for the player. In this way, the hold display 04TM002 of the first specific mode and the hold display 04TM002 of the second specific mode are displayed larger than the hold display of the normal mode, so that the hold display 04TM002 of the first specific mode and the second specific mode is displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using the hold display by paying attention to.

Further, the operation-related display 04TM001 is more conspicuous because it is displayed in a larger size than the hold display 04TM002, and is highly visible to the player. In this way, regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed, the operation-related display 04TM001 is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003, so that the operation-related display 04TM001 is focused on and the effect using the operation-related display is used. You can improve your interest.

FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart showing the change suggestion effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change suggestion effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the change suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the operation-related display corresponding to the variation display based on the new start winning, and also determines the change pattern of the operation-related display. In addition, the number and types of executions of the change suggestion effect to be executed when the display mode of the operation-related display is changed or not changed are determined, and the change pattern of the hold display corresponding to the variation display based on the new start prize is determined. decide.

In the change suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a command based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first start winning opening). It is confirmed whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S04TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of big hit. Based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a big hit will occur and the big hit type in the case of a big hit, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command indicating the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and first hold storage number addition designation commands are newly stored in the start winning command storage area. .. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S04TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 displays the final display mode of the operation-related display in the final display mode determination table (see FIG. 11-8) of the operation-related display. Determined based on (step S04TM1010). The processing after step S04TM1010 may be executed only when the fluctuation pattern type specified by the fluctuation category command is normal reach or super reach, and is executed only when the fluctuation pattern type is super reach. You can do it.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6 described above, the operation-related display can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. The final display mode of the operation-related display is from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the command at the start winning of one set received by the effect control CPU 120 (until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped). This is the final display mode of the operation-related display during the period of.

FIG. 11-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the operation-related display. As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the operation-related display is a normal mode, a first special mode [crack (small)], and a second special mode [crack (middle)). ] And any of the third special embodiment [crack (large)] can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these embodiments.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the execution is performed based on the start winning prize. The final display mode of the operation-related display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern is the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) at a rate of 90%, and the first special mode [crack (small)) at a rate of 18%. ] (Spherical image with small cracks), and at a rate of 2%, the second special mode [crack (medium)] (medium (larger than the first special mode and smaller than the third special mode) cracked sphere) (Image), and the third special aspect [crack (large)] (spherical image with large cracks) at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed based on the start winning prize. The final display mode of the operation-related display is the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) at a rate of 15%, and the first special mode [crack (small)] (spherical image with small cracks) at a rate of 30%. The second special mode [crack (medium)] (spherical image with moderate cracks) is obtained at a rate of 54%, and the third special mode [crack (large)] (large cracks are present) at a rate of 1%. It becomes a certain sphere image).

In this way, when the final display mode of the operation-related display is the third special mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest, and when the final display mode of the operation-related display is the second special mode, the big hit is achieved. When the final display mode of the operation-related display is the first special mode, the jackpot ratio is the third highest, and the final display mode of the operation-related display is the normal mode. In that case, the percentage of big hits is the lowest. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), it is highly expected that the display mode of the operation-related display will be a big hit in the order of normal mode <first special mode <second special mode <third special mode. Become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), when the display result is "off", the ratio that the final display mode of the operation-related display is the third special mode [crack (large)] is 0%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit", the ratio of the final display mode of the operation-related display to the third special mode [crack (large)] is 1%, so that the final display of the operation-related display is When the display mode is the third special mode [crack (large)], the display result is "big hit" at a rate of 100%. That is, the operation-related display of the third special mode [crack (large)] is an effect that confirms that a big hit is made. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the motion-related display and improve the interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the change pattern determination table of the operation-related display (FIGS. 11-8 (B), (C), (D), and (E)) for the change pattern regarding the display mode of the operation-related display. ) (Step S04TM1020).

11-8 (B), (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory views showing specific examples of change patterns of operation-related displays. As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B), (C), (D), and (E), in this embodiment, the display mode at the start of the fluctuation is changed to the final display mode (display mode determined in step S04TM1010). ), A plurality of change patterns are provided as change patterns for changing the display mode of the operation-related display. Here, the display mode at the start of the fluctuation is a hold display (round shape, hammer shape, or sword shape) corresponding to the fluctuation display corresponding to the start (or start) of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. This is a display mode of the operation-related display when the object) is shifted from the hold display area 04TM004 to the special effect area 04TM003 (as a result, when the hold display is erased). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the operation-related display in the normal mode is displayed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, the display mode at the start of the fluctuation is always the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), as the change pattern of the operation-related display, the operation-related display at the start of the fluctuation is a normal mode, and then the change suggestion effect is not executed and the operation-related display does not change and is final. The change pattern 101 in which the display mode remains the normal mode and the motion-related display at the start of the fluctuation are the normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change and the final display mode. Is the normal mode, and the movement-related display at the start of the fluctuation is the normal mode. After that, the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the movement-related display does not change, and then the second time. There is a change pattern 103 in which the change suggestion effect of the above is executed, but the operation-related display does not change, and the final display mode remains the normal mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the operation-related display at the start of the fluctuation is the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed to change the motion-related display, and the final display mode is changed. The change pattern 111 which is the first special mode [crack (small)] and the operation-related display at the start of the change are the normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the operation-related display does not change. After that, the second change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, and the change pattern 112 in which the final display mode becomes the first special mode [crack (small)] and the motion-related display at the start of the change are normal. This is an embodiment, after which the first change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the first special aspect [crack (small)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed. However, there is a change pattern 113 in which the operation-related display does not change and the final display mode remains the first special mode [crack (small)].

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (D), the operation-related display at the start of the fluctuation is the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed to change the motion-related display, and the final display mode is changed. The change pattern 121 which is the second special mode [crack (middle)] and the operation-related display at the start of the change are the normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the operation-related display does not change. After that, the second change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, and the change pattern 122 in which the final display mode becomes the second special mode [crack (middle)] and the motion-related display at the start of the change are normal. This is an embodiment, after which the first change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the first special aspect [crack (small)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed and the operation is performed. The change pattern 123 in which the related display changes and the final display mode becomes the second special mode [crack (middle)] and the operation-related display at the start of the change are the normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is performed. It is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the second special mode [crack (middle)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change, and the final display mode changes. There is a change pattern 124, which remains in the second special embodiment [crack (middle)].

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (E), the operation-related display at the start of the fluctuation is the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed to change the motion-related display, and the final display mode is changed. The change pattern 131 which is the third special mode [crack (large)] and the operation-related display at the start of the change are the normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the operation-related display does not change. After that, the second change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, and the change pattern 132 in which the final display mode becomes the third special mode [crack (large)] and the movement-related display at the start of the change are normal. This is an embodiment, after which the first change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the first special aspect [crack (small)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed and the operation is performed. The change pattern 133 in which the related display changes and the final display mode becomes the third special mode [crack (large)] and the operation-related display at the start of the fluctuation are the normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is performed. It is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the second special mode [crack (middle)], then the second change suggestion effect is executed, the motion-related display changes, and the final display mode is the third. There is a change pattern 134, which is a special aspect [crack (large)].

In the present embodiment, after the round, hammer-shaped or sword-shaped reserved display 04TM002 displayed in the reserved display area 04TM004 is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 with the start of the variable display ( (After the shifted hold display 04TM002 and the operation-related display 04TM001 of the normal mode overlap), (1) When the display mode of the operation-related display does not change from the normal mode until the end (change patterns 101, 102, 103). (2) When the display mode of the operation-related display finally changes to the first special mode [crack (small)] (change patterns 111, 112, 113), and (3) the display mode of the operation-related display is final. When the second special mode [crack (medium)] is changed (change patterns 121, 122, 123, 124), (4) the display mode of the operation-related display is finally changed to the third special mode [crack (large)]. ] (Change patterns 131, 132, 133, 134).

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), when the final display mode of the operation-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the normal mode, the display result is "missing" (that is, designated by the symbol designation command). When the display result is "off"), the change pattern 101 is formed at a rate of 60%, the change pattern 102 is formed at a rate of 39%, the change pattern 103 is obtained at a rate of 1%, and the display result is "big hit". (That is, when the display result specified by the symbol specification command is a "big hit"), the change pattern 101 is formed at a rate of 38%, the change pattern 102 is formed at a rate of 60%, and the change is changed at a rate of 2%. It becomes the pattern 103.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), when the final display mode of the operation-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the first special mode [crack (small)], the display result is "missing" ( That is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "off"), the change pattern 111 is formed at a rate of 60%, the change pattern 112 is formed at a rate of 39%, and the change pattern 113 is formed at a rate of 1%. , When the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 111 is formed at a rate of 38%, and the change pattern 112 is set at a rate of 60%. Therefore, the change pattern 113 is obtained at a rate of 2%.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (D), when the final display mode of the operation-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the second special mode [cracking (middle)], the display result is "missing" ( That is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "off"), the change pattern 121 is formed at a rate of 50%, the change pattern 122 is formed at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 123 is formed at a rate of 19%. When the change pattern 123 is 1% and the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol specification command is "big hit"), the change pattern 121 is 13%. It becomes the change pattern 122 at the rate of 35%, the change pattern 123 at the rate of 49%, and the change pattern 123 at the rate of 3%.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (E), when the final display mode of the operation-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the third special mode [crack (large)], the display result is "big hit" ( That is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the change pattern 131 is formed at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 132 is formed at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 133 is formed at a rate of 30%. , 40% change pattern 133. As described above, when the final display mode of the operation-related display is the third special mode [crack (large)], the display result is always "big hit", so the judgment value when the display result is "missing". Is not allocated.

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) to (D), regarding the change pattern of the operation-related display, when the final display mode is the normal mode, the order is change pattern 101 <change pattern 102 <change pattern 103. When the expectation of a big hit is high and the final display mode is the first special mode [crack (small)], the expectation of a big hit is in the order of change pattern 111 <change pattern 112 <change pattern 113. When the final display mode is the second special mode [crack (middle)], the expectation that the jackpot will be a big hit in the order of change pattern 121 <change pattern 122 <change pattern 123 <change pattern 124 is high. Therefore, when the change suggestion effect is executed twice, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the change suggestion effect is executed once. When the change suggestion effect is executed twice, the display mode of the motion-related display does not change in the first change suggestion effect when the display mode of the motion-related display changes in the first change suggestion effect. Expectations for a big hit are higher than at times. Further, the ratio of selecting the change pattern in which the display mode of the operation-related display does not change in the second change suggestion effect is extremely low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8, the display mode of the operation-related display may change to the mode with the higher expectation of big hit, while the display mode of the operation-related display has the lower expectation of jackpot. The change pattern is set so that there is no possibility of changing the aspect. That is, there is no pattern that changes from the third special mode [crack (large)] to the second special mode [crack (medium)] or the first special mode [crack (small)], and the second special mode [ There is no pattern that changes from [crack (medium)] to the first special mode [crack (small)]. Further, there is no pattern that changes from any one of the first special mode [crack (small)] to the third special mode [crack (large)] to the normal mode. As a result, the player's expectation during the variable display is maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first change suggestion effect. That is, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect at least once. If it is not decided to execute the first change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM1030), that is, if the determined change suggestion effect is executed 0 times, the process is terminated as it is.

If it is decided to perform the first change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode of the first change suggestion effect to the change suggestion effect determination table for the first time (FIG. 11-9 (F)) (see step S04TM1040).

FIG. 11-9 (F) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the first change suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (F), in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types as the first change suggestion effect for each of the change patterns of the operation-related display (change patterns determined in step S04TM1020). A determination value for determining which type of change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, and third change suggestion effect) to be executed is assigned.

As a change suggestion effect, a first change suggestion effect in which an ally character without a weapon strikes an action-related display, and a second change suggestion effect in which a ally character with a hammer strikes an action-related display. There is a production and a third change suggestion production in which an ally character holding a sword performs a slashing action on an action-related display. Both the first change suggestion effect and the third change suggestion effect are effects in which the appearing ally character acts on the action-related display, and the player changes the display mode of the action-related display due to the appearance of the ally character. I expect you to do it.

When the first change suggestion effect in the present embodiment is executed, (i) if the type of the first change suggestion effect is determined to be the first change suggestion effect (without a weapon), the player has a weapon. An unaffiliated ally character appears from the right side of the screen, then the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is executed, and (ii) the type of the first change suggestion effect is determined to be the second change suggestion effect (hammer). If so, an ally character with a hammer appears from the right side of the screen, then the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed, and (iii) the type of the first change suggestion effect is the third. If the change suggestion effect (sword) is determined, an ally character holding the sword appears from the right side of the screen, and then the third change suggestion effect (sword) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (F), in the first change suggestion effect, when the change pattern of the operation-related display determined in step S04TM1020 is the change pattern 102, the first change suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 80%. It becomes a change suggestion effect, a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, a third change suggestion effect at a rate of 0%, and a change suggestion effect at a rate of 35% in the case of a change pattern 111. At a rate of 40%, it becomes a second change suggestion effect, at a rate of 25%, it becomes a third change suggestion effect, and in the case of a change pattern 121, it becomes a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 35%. It becomes the second change suggestion effect, the third change suggestion effect at a rate of 45%, the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 25% in the case of the change pattern 131. At a rate of 70%, it becomes a third change suggestion effect, and in the case of a change pattern 103, it becomes a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, and 0%. The ratio is the third change suggestion effect, and in the case of the change pattern 112, the ratio is the first change suggestion effect, the ratio is 20%, the second change suggestion effect, and the ratio is 0%, the third change. In the case of the change pattern 113, it becomes the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 35%, the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 40%, and the third change suggestion effect at a rate of 25%. In the case of the pattern 122, the first change suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 80%, the second change suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 20%, the third change suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 0%, and the change pattern 123 is used. At a rate of 35%, it becomes a first change suggestion effect, at a rate of 40%, it becomes a second change suggestion effect, at a rate of 25%, it becomes a third change suggestion effect, and in the case of a change pattern 124, it becomes 20%. The ratio of 1 is the 1st change suggestion effect, the ratio of 35% is the 2nd change suggestion effect, the ratio of 45% is the 3rd change suggestion effect, and in the case of the change pattern 132, the ratio is 80%. It becomes a change suggestion effect, a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, a third change suggestion effect at a rate of 0%, and a change suggestion effect at a rate of 35% in the case of a change pattern 133. At a rate of 40%, it becomes a second change suggestion effect, at a rate of 25%, it becomes a third change suggestion effect, and in the case of a change pattern 134, it becomes a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 35%. It becomes the second change suggestion production , 40% will be the third change suggestion effect.

In this way, the rate of change in the display mode of the motion-related display is higher in the second change suggestion effect than in the first change suggestion effect, and the motion-related display is higher in the third change suggestion effect than in the second change suggestion effect. The rate at which the display mode of is changed is high. Then, when the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the operation-related display may not change, while when the third change suggestion effect is executed, the operation-related display is displayed. The aspect is always changing. As described above, when the display mode of the motion-related display changes, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display mode of the motion-related display does not change. Therefore, the first change suggestion effect <second change suggestion effect <first 3 The expectation of big hits increases in the order of change suggestion production. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the ally character appears (whether or not the change suggestion effect is executed). Furthermore, when an ally character appears (when a change suggestion effect is executed), the type of item that the ally character has (type of change suggestion effect: no weapon, hammer, sword) will be noticed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the change suggestion production.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first change suggestion effect is related to the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display. The display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display is that the hold display is shifted from the position second closest to the special effect area 04TM003 in the hold display area 04TM004 to the position closest to the position (the position where the variable display is executed next). This is the final display mode of the pending display later.

In the present embodiment, when the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is determined as the first change suggestion effect, at the time of the final shift of the hold display corresponding to the change display in which the change suggestion effect is executed. The change pattern of the pending display is determined so that the display mode is the normal mode (without weapons). Further, when the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is determined as the first change suggestion effect, the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display corresponding to the variation display in which the change suggestion effect is executed is the first. 1 The change pattern of the hold display is determined so as to be a specific mode (hammer). Further, when the third change suggestion effect (sword) is determined as the first change suggestion effect, the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display corresponding to the variation display in which the change suggestion effect is executed is the first. 2 The change pattern of the hold display is determined so as to have a specific mode (sword).

In the present embodiment, since the display mode of the hold display at the time of the final shift is the final display mode of the hold display, the hold display is the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 in the hold display area 04TM004 (next). When it is in the position where the variable display is executed), the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the timing at which the hold display shifts from the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 in the hold display area 04TM004 to the special effect area 04TM003 (the position). The display mode of the hold display does not change even at the timing immediately before the hold display overlaps with the operation-related display 04TM001 and is erased, and the variation display corresponding to the hold display is started).

That is, when it is determined that the change suggestion effect is executed, and the hold display is in the normal mode (round shape) at the time of the final shift, the first change display corresponding to the hold display is performed. When the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is executed as the change suggestion effect and the hold display is the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of the final shift, the change display corresponding to the hold display is used. The second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed as the first change suggestion effect, and if the hold display is the second specific mode (sword) at the time of the final shift, the change display corresponding to the hold display is performed. In, the third change suggestion effect (sword) is executed as the first change suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the hold display with the change suggestion effect for the operation-related display.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11) (step S04TM1050).

11-10 and 11-11 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table of the hold display for determining the change pattern of the hold display. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing when the nth hold display 04TM002 corresponding to the start prize is displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 (i) At the start winning timing), the nth hold display 04TM002 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer shape) or the second specific mode (sword shape) different from the normal mode (round shape). There is a possibility. Further, in the case of (ii) n ≧ 2, the hold display 04TM002 corresponding to the start winning is placed at a position one higher in the hold display area 04TM004 (a position close to the special effect area 04TM003). At the shifted timing, the display mode of the hold display may change (change from the normal mode to the first specific mode or the second specific mode, change from the first specific mode to the second specific mode). Therefore, when the first hold storage number becomes 2 (n = 2) due to the start winning, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 may change once, and the first hold storage number becomes 3 due to the start winning. When the above (n ≧ 3) is obtained, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 may change twice.

In FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, what kind of display mode the display information (hold display 04TM002) corresponding to the variable display becomes at each timing of (i) and (ii) for each change pattern. Shows. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, "normal" refers to the normal aspect of the round shape, and "hammer" indicates the first specific aspect of the hammer shape, "sword". "" Indicates the second specific aspect of the sword shape.

When the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for one hold shown in FIG. 11-10 (H). Select the change pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (H), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (without a weapon), the determination result at the time of starting winning (design designation command). It is a display result specified by, and the change pattern 201 is obtained at a rate of 100% regardless of the missed or big hit). The change pattern 201 is a change pattern that displays the hold display of the advance notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). Regardless, the change pattern 202 is obtained at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 202 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the advance notice target is displayed in the first specific mode at the time of starting winning. When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the judgment result at the time of starting prize (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). Regardless, the change pattern 203 is obtained at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 203 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the advance notice target is displayed in the second specific mode at the time of starting winning.

When the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for the two holds shown in FIG. 11-10 (I). Select the change pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (I), in the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (without weapon), the determination result (design designation command) at the time of starting winning is obtained. It is a display result specified by, and the change pattern 211 is obtained at a rate of 100% regardless of the missed or big hit). The change pattern 211 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the final shift.

When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern 212 and the change pattern 213, respectively. The change pattern 212 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift. 213 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift. be.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (I), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the display result is "missing" (that is, the display result). When the display result specified by the specified command is "missing"), the change pattern 212 is obtained at a rate of 30%, the change pattern 213 is obtained at a rate of 70%, and the display result is "big hit" (that is,). When the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit"), the change pattern 212 is obtained at a rate of 70%, and the change pattern 213 is obtained at a rate of 30%.

When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the judgment result at the time of starting prize (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern 214, the change pattern 215, and the change pattern 216, respectively. The change pattern 214 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. 215 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. , The change pattern 216 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the start winning. It is a change pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (I), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the display result is "missing" (that is, the display result). If the display result specified by the specified command is "off"), the change pattern 214 is displayed at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 215 is displayed at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 216 is displayed at a rate of 60%. When the result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the change pattern 214 is obtained at a rate of 60%, and the change pattern 215 is obtained at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 216 is obtained at a rate of 10%.

When the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for the three holds shown in FIG. 11-10 (J). Select the change pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (J), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (without a weapon), the determination result at the time of starting winning (design designation command). It is a display result specified by, and the change pattern 221 is obtained at a rate of 100% regardless of the missed or big hit). In the change pattern 221, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the normal mode.

When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern 222, the change pattern 223, and the change pattern 224, respectively. In the change pattern 222, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the first specific mode (hammer), and the change pattern 223 displays the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then holds the notice target at the timing of one shift. It is a change pattern that changes the display to the first specific mode (hammer) and does not change the hold display of the notice target as it is in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display of the above in the first specific mode (hammer), the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of one shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the first specific mode (hammer).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (J), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the display result is "missing" (that is, the display result). When the display result specified by the specified command is "off"), the change pattern 222 is displayed at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 223 is displayed at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 224 is displayed at a rate of 60%. When the result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the change pattern 222 is obtained at a rate of 40%, and the change pattern 223 is obtained at a rate of 30%. , The change pattern is 224 at a rate of 30%.

When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the judgment result at the time of starting prize (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). The determination values are assigned to the change pattern 225, the change pattern 226, the change pattern 227, the change pattern 228, the change pattern 229, and the change pattern 230, respectively. In the change pattern 225, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the second specific mode (sword), and the change pattern 226 is a hold display of the notice target at the timing of one shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the display to the first specific mode (hammer) and changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of one shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is (sword), and the change pattern 228 displays the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of starting winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target at the timing of one shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift without changing the first specific mode (hammer), and the change pattern 229 is the notice target at the start winning prize. After displaying the hold display in the first specific mode (hammer), the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of one shift, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is in the second specific mode (sword), and the change pattern 230 is a notice at the timing of one shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the target is not changed in the second specific mode (sword), and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (J), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the display result is "missing" (that is, the display result). (When the display result specified by the specified command is "missing"), the change pattern 225 becomes the change pattern 225 at the rate of 5%, the change pattern 226 becomes the change pattern 226 at the rate of 10%, and the change pattern 227 becomes the change pattern 227 at the rate of 5%. When the rate of% is change pattern 228, the rate of 25% is change pattern 229, the rate of 30% is change pattern 230, and the display result is "big hit" (that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command). Is a "big hit"), the change pattern is 225 at a rate of 25%, the change pattern 226 is at a rate of 19%, the change pattern 227 is at a rate of 25%, and the change pattern is 228 at a rate of 13%. , The change pattern 229 is obtained at a rate of 13%, and the change pattern 230 is obtained at a rate of 5%.

When the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for the four holds shown in FIG. 11-11 (K). Select the change pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (K), in the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (without weapon), the determination result (design designation command) at the time of starting winning is obtained. It is a display result specified by, and the change pattern 231 is obtained at a rate of 100% regardless of the missed or big hit). In the change pattern 231, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the one shift, and the notice target is made at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the above in the normal mode and does not change the hold display of the advance notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the final shift.

When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the judgment result at the time of starting winning (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern 232, the change pattern 233, the change pattern 234, and the change pattern 235, respectively. In the change pattern 232, after the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, and the notice target is given at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift without changing the hold display of the normal mode, and the change pattern 233 is the hold of the notice target at the time of starting winning. After displaying the display in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the one shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that changes and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift, and the change pattern 234 displays the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. After that, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the one shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift, and the change pattern 235 displays the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of starting winning. After making it, the hold display of the notice target remains in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the one shift, and the hold display of the notice target remains in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the hold display of the advance notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (K), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the display result is "missing" (that is, the display result). If the display result specified by the specified command is "off"), the change pattern 232 is 20%, the change pattern 233 is 20%, the change pattern 234 is 20%, and 40. When the change pattern is 235 at a rate of% and the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the change pattern is 232 at a rate of 30%. , The change pattern 233 at a rate of 30%, the change pattern 234 at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 235 at a rate of 10%.

When the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the judgment result at the time of starting prize (display result specified by the symbol designation command, missed or big hit). Judgment for change pattern 236, change pattern 237, change pattern 238, change pattern 239, change pattern 240, change pattern 241 and change pattern 242, change pattern 243, change pattern 244, and change pattern 245, respectively. A value has been assigned. The change pattern 236 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of one shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the notice target at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift without changing the hold display of the normal mode, and the change pattern 237 is the hold of the notice target at the start winning prize. After displaying the display in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the one shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts. It is a change pattern that changes and changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift, and the change pattern 238 is after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first shift, and the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the second shift, and the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword), and the change pattern 239 is the timing of one shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. The hold display of the notice target is changed to the first specific mode (hammer), and the hold display of the notice target is not changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts, and the notice target is at the timing of the final shift. This is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the above to the second specific mode (sword). The hold display is changed to the first specific mode (hammer), the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the two shifts, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change in the specific mode (sword), and the change pattern 241 displays the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then displays the hold display of the notice target at the timing of one shift. The hold display of the notice target is changed to the specific mode (sword) at the timing of the two shifts, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is (sword), and the change pattern 242 is predicted at the start winning prize. After displaying the hold display of the notification target in the first specific mode (hammer), the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the first shift, and at the timing of the second shift. The change pattern 243 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of one shift, and the shift is performed twice. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of, and does not change the hold display of the notice target as the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. Displays the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of the start winning, and then changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of one shift, and shifts twice. It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of, and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. In the pattern 245, the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the second specific mode (sword) at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of one shift. 2. A change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the second shift, and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. Is.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (K), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the display result is "missing" (that is, the display result). If the display result specified by the specified command is "missing"), the change pattern 236 is at a rate of 3%, the change pattern is 237 at a rate of 7%, and the change pattern is 238 at a rate of 3%. % Percentage of change pattern 239, 7% of change pattern 240, 3% of change pattern 241, 15% of change pattern 242, 15% of change pattern 243, 15 When the change pattern is 244 at a rate of%, the change pattern is 245 at a rate of 25%, and the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"). , 15% rate of change pattern 236, 10% rate of change pattern 237, 15% rate of change pattern 238, 10% rate of change pattern 239, and 10% rate of change pattern 240. , 15% rate of change pattern 241 and 8% rate of change pattern 242, 8% rate of change pattern 243, 8% rate of change pattern 244, and 1% rate of change pattern 245. Become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, a change in which the display mode of the hold display changes rather than a change pattern in which the display mode of the hold display does not change (change pattern 230, change pattern 245, etc. in this example). The pattern (in this example, change pattern 225, change pattern 239, etc.) has a higher expectation of big hit. Further, a change pattern in which the display mode of the hold display changes by one step with one shift (in this example, from the normal mode to the first specific mode (change pattern 226, change pattern 240, etc.), or from the first specific mode to the first. A change pattern in which the display mode of the hold display changes in two stages with one shift (in this example, the second specific mode from the normal mode) rather than the two specific modes (change pattern 226, change pattern 240, etc.). The jackpot expectation is higher in the mode (change pattern that changes to the change pattern 227, change pattern 241 and the like).

As described above, when the hold display is a change pattern (change pattern 201, change pattern 211, change pattern 221 and change pattern 231) that does not change from the normal mode, the first change suggestion effect is the first change suggestion effect (change pattern 201, change pattern 211, change pattern 221 and change pattern 231). Change pattern (change pattern 201, change pattern 211, change pattern 221 and change) in which the hold display is finally determined to be the first specific mode (hammer) or the second specific mode (sword). In the case of a change pattern other than the pattern 231), the first change suggestion effect is determined to be the second change suggestion effect (hammer) or the third change suggestion effect (sword). Then, as described above, since the ratio of changing the display mode of the operation-related display increases in the order of the first change suggestion effect <second change suggestion effect <third change suggestion effect, the display mode of the hold display is changed. The rate at which the display mode of the operation-related display changes is higher when the display mode of the hold display has changed than when the display mode of the hold display has not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by associating the display mode of the hold display with the display mode of the operation-related display.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second change suggestion effect. If it is not decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM1060), the process ends as it is.

If it is decided to perform the second change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode of the second change suggestion effect to the second change suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 11). -9 (Refer to G)) is determined (step S04TM1070), and the process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 11-9 (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the second change suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (G), in this embodiment, a plurality of change suggestion effects (first change suggestion) are given to each of the change patterns of the operation-related display (change patterns determined in step S04TM1020). A determination value for determining which of the effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect) is executed is assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (G), when the change pattern of the operation-related display determined in step S04TM1020 is the change pattern 103, it becomes the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and 20%. The ratio is the second change suggestion effect, the ratio is 0%, the third change suggestion effect, and in the case of the change pattern 112, the ratio is 35%, the first change suggestion effect, and the 40% ratio is the second change. It becomes a suggestion effect, a third change suggestion effect at a rate of 25%, a change suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 10%, and 10 % Is the third change suggestion effect, and in the case of the change pattern 122, 20% is the first change suggestion effect, 35% is the second change suggestion effect, and 45% is the second change suggestion effect. 3 Change suggestion effects, and in the case of change pattern 123, 35% is the first change suggestion effect, 40% is the second change suggestion effect, and 25% is the third change suggestion effect. In the case of the change pattern 124, 95% is the first change suggestion effect, 5% is the second change suggestion effect, 0% is the third change suggestion effect, and the change pattern 132 is. In some cases, 5% is the first change suggestion effect, 25% is the second change suggestion effect, 70% is the third change suggestion effect, and the change pattern is 133. 20% is the first change suggestion effect, 35% is the second change suggestion effect, 45% is the third change suggestion effect, and 35% is the change pattern 134. It becomes the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 40%, and the third change suggestion effect at a rate of 25%.

In this way, even in the second change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect has a higher rate of change in the display mode of the operation-related display than the first change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is higher than the second change suggestion effect. The rate of change in the display mode of the operation-related display is higher in the change suggestion effect. Then, when the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the operation-related display may not change, while when the third change suggestion effect is executed, the operation-related display is displayed. The aspect is always changing. As described above, when the display mode of the motion-related display changes, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display mode of the motion-related display does not change. Therefore, the first change suggestion effect <second change suggestion effect <first 3 The expectation of big hits increases in the order of change suggestion production. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the ally character appears again (whether or not the second change suggestion effect is executed). In addition, when the ally character reappears (when the second change suggestion effect is executed), pay attention to the type of item that the ally character has (type of change suggestion effect: no weapon, hammer, sword). become. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the change suggestion production.

(Processing to determine the effect at the start of fluctuation)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying a display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying a variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type in case of big hit), change time of special symbol and effect content (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the special symbol (first special symbol) is used. It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 11-12 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern for execution based on a command and a variation pattern specification command (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-12.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second change suggestion effect. If it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM2000), the process proceeds to step S04TM2010, and if it is not decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM2000). , Step S04TM2040.

If it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first SU (step-up) notice effect and the second SU (step-up) notice effect, which will be described later. The presence or absence is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table (see FIG. 11-13 (L)) of the SU notice effect (step S04TM2010).

The first SU (step-up) notice effect can be developed step by step from the first stage (step 1) to the second stage (step 2), and if it develops to the second stage (step 2), the first stage (step 2). This is a production in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than when it is completed in one stage (step 1). In the first stage (step 1) in the first SU notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the whole body of the ally character is displayed in a small window on the screen, and the second stage (step 1) in the first SU notice effect. In step 2), as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (21), the enlarged upper body of the ally character is displayed in a large window on the screen. Further, when the first SU notice effect is executed, when the final stage (first stage or second stage) determined in advance is reached, a predetermined line (FIG. 11-19 (21)) is reached after a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. ) Is displayed.

On the other hand, it is confirmed that the second SU (step-up) notice production develops from the first stage (step 1) to the second stage (step 2), and the production mode of the second stage (step 2) is This is a production related to the second change suggestion production. In the first stage (step 1) in the second SU notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the whole body of the ally character is displayed in a small window on the screen, and the second stage (step 1) in the second SU notice effect. In step 2), as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (12), an enlarged ally character pops out from the large window on the screen, and then a second change suggestion effect is performed. The aspect of the ally character that pops out of the window in the second stage (step 2) is an aspect related to the second change suggestion effect executed thereafter, and (i) the type of the second change suggestion effect is If the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is determined, an ally character who does not have a weapon pops out of the window, and then the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is executed, (ii) 2 If the type of the second change suggestion effect is determined to be the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the ally character with the hammer pops out of the window, and then the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed. , (Iii) If the type of the second change suggestion effect is determined to be the third change suggestion effect (sword), the ally character with the sword pops out of the window, and then the third change suggestion effect (sword). Sword) is executed.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect and the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect have a common effect mode. .. Therefore, the predetermined line (“chance”) is displayed or the second stage (step 2) is displayed without shifting to the second stage (step 2) after the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect is completed. ), The player cannot grasp that the first SU notice effect was executed instead of the second SU notice effect. Further, until the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect is completed and the process proceeds to the second stage (step 2), the player indicates that the second SU notice effect was executed instead of the first SU notice effect. Can't figure out. Therefore, at the time of the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect and the time of the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect, the player can perform either the first SU notice effect or the second SU notice effect. You will be interested in whether or not is being executed, and you will be paying attention to the subsequent production transition.

That is, in the state where the ally character is displayed in the small window (the state in which it is a common effect mode), the player displays the enlarged ally character in the next large window (first SU notice). It has both the expectation that the second stage (step 2) of the effect is executed and the expectation that the character pops out of the window (the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is executed). In this way, the player's expectation can be maintained by providing a plurality of development patterns from a common production mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-13 (L), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the SU notice effect differs depending on the display result. If the display result is "missing" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing"), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 20%. It is decided to execute the second SU notice effect at a rate of%, and it is decided not to execute any of the notice effects of the first SU notice effect and the second SU notice effect at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 30%. , It is decided to execute the second SU notice effect at a rate of 50%, and it is decided not to execute either the first SU notice effect or the second SU notice effect at a rate of 20%.

As described above, when it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect, in step S04TM2010, whether or not to execute the first SU (step-up) notice effect and the second SU (step-up) notice effect is determined. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table of the SU advance notice effect (see FIG. 11-13 (L)), but if it is decided to execute the first SU advance notice effect here, the first SU advance notice effect and the second SU are also determined. When it is decided not to execute any of the advance notice effects, that is, when it is decided not to execute the second SU advance notice effect even though it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect. Is to execute the second change suggestion effect in which a ally character appears from the right side of the screen at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing before the reach state is established) as in the first change suggestion effect. In the second change suggestion effect executed in this case, (i) if the type of the second change suggestion effect is determined to be the first change suggestion effect (without a weapon), an ally who does not have a weapon. The character appears from the right side of the screen, then the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is executed, and (ii) the type of the second change suggestion effect is determined to be the second change suggestion effect (hammer). In this case, an ally character with a hammer appears from the right side of the screen, then the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed, and (iii) the type of the second change suggestion effect is the third change suggestion effect. If it is determined to be (sword), an ally character with a sword appears from the right side of the screen, and then the third change suggestion effect (sword) is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first SU notice effect. If it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect (YES in step S04TM2020), the effect mode of the first SU notice effect is determined by the effect mode determination table of the first SU notice effect (see FIG. 11-13 (N)). Is determined based on (step S04TM2030). On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first SU notice effect (NO in step S04TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S04TM2070 as it is.

FIG. 11-13 (N) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table of the first SU notice effect. As shown in FIG. 11-13 (N), in this embodiment, one of the "first stage" and the "second stage" is used as the final step of the first SU notice effect, depending on the display result. It is possible to determine, and a determination value is assigned to each of these production modes.

As shown in FIG. 11-13 (N), when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), the first SU notice effect is produced. The aspect (final step) is "first stage" at a rate of 70% and "second stage" at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the effect mode (final step) of the first SU notice effect is 10%. The ratio is "first stage" and 90% is "second stage".

Further, if it is not decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first SU (step-up) advance notice effect is executed, and whether or not the SU advance notice effect is executed. The determination is made based on the determination table (see FIG. 11-13 (M)) (step S04TM2040).

As shown in FIG. 11-13 (M), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution ratio of the SU notice effect differs depending on the display result. If the display result is "off" (that is, if the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 30%, 70. It is decided not to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of%. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 80%. , 20% decide not to execute the first SU notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first SU notice effect. If it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect (YES in step S04TM2050), the effect mode of the first SU notice effect is determined by the effect mode determination table of the first SU notice effect (see FIG. 11-13 (N)). Is determined based on (step S04TM2060). On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first SU notice effect (NO in step S04TM2050), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S04TM2070 as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect determination table (see FIG. 11-13 (O)) (step S04TM2070), and performs the process as it is. finish.

The cut-in notice effect in the present embodiment is a notice effect executed immediately after the reach state is established, and the effect control CPU 120 is predetermined when it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect. At the same timing (immediately after the reach state is established), the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed (see FIG. 11-17 (15)). Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 04TM102B has been operated, the cut-in notice effect of the mode determined in step S04TM1070 is executed.

FIG. 11-13 (O) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the cut-in notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-13 (O), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect differs depending on the display result. When the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the effect mode (characters of the cut-in image) of the cut-in notice effect is 30%. The ratio of 1 is "CHANGE ??", the ratio of 10% is "CHANGE !!", and the ratio of 60% is that the cut-in notice effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the effect mode (characters of the cut-in image) of the cut-in notice effect is The first mode "CHANGE ??" is set at a rate of 5%, the second mode "CHANGE !!" is set at a rate of 65%, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 30%.

(Specific example when the change suggestion effect is executed twice)
Next, a specific example in which the change suggestion effect is executed twice will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14, 11-15, 11-16, and 11-17. 11-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the change suggestion effect is executed twice, and FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and 11-17 have 2 change suggestion effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it is executed once.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result specified by the display result designation command is a "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a "super reach jackpot". In addition to executing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other is executed as a super reach effect. Then, by executing a victory effect in which the ally character finally wins, the occurrence of a big hit is notified.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S04TM1010 that the final display mode of the operation-related display is the second special mode [cracking (middle)] in the change suggestion effect determination process, and in step S04TM1020, the operation-related display. It is decided that the change pattern of the display is the change pattern 123 (normal → crack (small) → crack (medium)), and in step S04TM1040, the first change suggestion effect is the third change suggestion effect (sword). In step S04TM1050, the change pattern of the hold display is determined to be the change pattern 226 (normal → hammer → sword), and in step S04TM1070, the second change suggestion effect is the second change suggestion effect (hammer). I have decided to do it.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second SU notice effect in step S04TM2010 in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, and in step S04TM2070, the cut-in notice effect is performed in the second mode "CHANGE !!". I have decided to do it. In the following, FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and 11-17 show examples when it is decided to perform the change suggestion effect twice.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (1), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 2. In 5R, the variation display of the decorative pattern (variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 11-14) is executed. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode is displayed, and in the hold display area 04TM004, two hold displays 04TM002 in the normal mode (round shape) are displayed. ing.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. When the effect image shown in FIG. 11-15 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 2. In 5R, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed (at the timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 11-14), a new start winning prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A, and the first reserved storage number becomes 3. It shall be. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the hold display 04TM002 in the hold display area 04TM004 based on the reception of the command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 in the normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 3. The decorative symbol "4" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, the operation-related display 04TM001 in the normal mode is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003, and three hold displays 04TM002 are displayed in the hold display area 04TM004. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (4), the effect control CPU 120 specially displays the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 one by one (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-14). The shift display is performed on the area 04TM003 side, and the next variation display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode, which was displayed at the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003, is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and erased. At this time, the hold display 04TM002 is deleted at the timing when the shifted hold display 04TM002 overlaps with the operation-related display 04TM001, so that the player can see whether the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode has been absorbed by the operation-related display 04TM001. looks like.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (4), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-14). In the display area 5R, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the hold display 04TM002 to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the first specific mode (in this example, from a round shape to a hammer shape) based on the change pattern 226 of the hold display. ). As a result, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode (round shape) and the hold display 04TM002 in the first specific mode (hammer type) are displayed in the hold display area 04TM004. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (5), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 2. The decorative symbol "2" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, the operation-related display 04TM001 in the normal mode is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003, and the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode and the hold display 04TM002 in the first specific mode are displayed in the hold display area 04TM004. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 specially displays the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 one by one (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-14). The shift display is performed on the area 04TM003 side, and the next variation display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode, which was displayed at the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003, is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and erased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-14). In the display area 5R, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the hold display 04TM002 to be notified is changed from the first specific mode to the second specific mode (hammer type in this example) based on the change pattern 226 of the hold display. Change from the image of the image to the image of the sword shape). As a result, the hold display 04TM002 of the second specific mode (sword shape) is displayed in the hold display area 04TM004. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 1. The decorative symbol "2" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, the operation-related display 04TM001 of the normal mode is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003, and the hold display 04TM002 of the second specific mode is displayed in the hold display area 04TM004. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (8), the effect control CPU 120 has one special effect area of the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-14). The shift display is performed on the 04TM003 side, and the next variation display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the hold display 04TM002 of the second specific mode (sword shape) is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and erased. At this time, the hold display 04TM002 is deleted at the timing when the shifted hold display 04TM002 overlaps with the operation-related display 04TM001, so that the player can see the hold display 04TM002 in the second specific mode (sword shape) as if it were operation-related. It looks as if it was absorbed by the display 04TM001.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (8), the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-14). In the display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the third change suggestion effect while executing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-15 (9), the first change suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-14) from the start of the fluctuation based on the decision to be performed. As a result, the third change suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the ally character 04TM010C with a sword appears from the right side of the screen with the start of the third change suggestion effect. At this time, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (10) (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 11-14), the appearing ally character 04TM010C is opposed to the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode. Take the action of slashing with a sword. In this way, as a result of performing the effect that the ally character 04TM010C acts on the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, the change pattern 123 (the first change suggestion effect [crack (small)) ], The operation-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) to the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks) at the end of the first change suggestion effect. (Fig. 11-16 (11)). At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the first change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the effect control CPU 120 ends the third change suggestion effect (erases the ally character 04TM010C that has performed the action with the sword). The first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect is started based on the decision to execute the second SU notice effect. In the present embodiment, when the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect is started, a small window is displayed in the upper center of the image display device 5, and a ally character is displayed in the small window.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second change suggestion effect while executing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. Based on the decision to do, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (12) (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 11-14), the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is started. .. In the present embodiment, when the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is started, a window larger than the first stage is displayed in the upper center of the image display device 5, and an ally holding a hammer from that window. The character 04TM010B pops out, and the second change suggestion effect is started as the second change suggestion effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (13) (at the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 11-14), the appearing ally character 04TM010B has the operation-related display 04TM001 (small cracks) of the first special aspect. Perform the action of hitting a certain sphere image) with a hammer. In this way, as a result of executing the effect that the ally character 04TM010B acts on the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with small cracks) of the first special aspect, the change pattern 123 (the second change suggestion effect [cracking]. (Middle)], at the end of the second change suggestion effect, the motion-related display 04TM001 changes from the first special mode (a spherical image with small cracks) to the second special mode (medium cracks). It changes to a spherical image with cracks) (Fig. 11-17 (14)). That is, the cracks in the operation-related display 04TM001 are enlarged. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the second change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-17 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second change suggestion effect (erases the ally character 04TM010C that has performed the action by the hammer), and at the same time, establishes the reach state in the fluctuation pattern. At the appropriate timing, the decorative symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 to enter the reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. Display (timing of T12 in FIG. 11-14).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (15), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the decorative symbol of "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, thereby setting the reach state. In the continuous state (at the timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 11-14), the operation promotion display 04TM030 for prompting the player to operate the push button 04TM102B is displayed. The operation promotion display 04TM030 includes an image imitating the push button 04TM102B and a downward arrow displayed above the image imitating the push button 04TM102B, and is a display prompting to press the push button 04TM102B. It has become. The first operation promotion display displayed here is an operation promotion display corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with moderate cracks) of the second special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (16), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 04TM102B while the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed (T14 shown in FIGS. 11-14). (At the timing of), the cut-in notice effect of the second aspect is executed, and the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANGE !!”) is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with moderate cracks) of the second special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in notice effect and executes the battle effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (17). Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the ally character 04TM010 and the enemy character 04TM015 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T15 in FIGS. 11-14). Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with moderate cracks) of the second special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (18), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes display control of the battle effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T16 in FIG. 11-14). During this period, the display control regarding the middle part of the battle effect (the effect image in which the ally character 04TM010 is jumping toward the enemy character 04TM015) is continuously executed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays an effect image on the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with medium cracks) of the second special aspect displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the operation-related display 04TM001 shining. In this way, the effect image is displayed on the operation-related display 04TM001 during the period in which the display control of the battle effect is continuously executed in the image display device 5, so that the player is made to pay attention to the operation-related display 04TM001. , You can have a sense of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is continuously executing display control of the battle effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T17 in FIG. 11-14). The operation-related display 04TM001 of the second special aspect accompanied by the effect image is erased from the special effect area 04TM003, and an operation promotion display for urging the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed in the center of the screen. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is a display mode that reflects the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 (immediately before erasing) that has been displayed until then, and is larger than the operation-related display 04TM001 (the display range is larger). Since it is displayed in the center of the screen (widely), it is more visible to the player than the operation-related display 04TM001. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is an image imitating the shape of the spherical button 04TM102A and includes the characters "Blow !!", so that the player can easily operate the spherical button 04TM102A once. It is possible to grasp.

In the present embodiment, as the operation promotion display for urging the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A, the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third There is a special operation promotion display 04TM035C.

The special operation promotion display 04TM035 is an operation promotion display corresponding to the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, and imitates the spherical button 04TM102A in the normal mode (split hemisphere 04TM141A, 04TM141B are fully closed). It consists of the image. The effect control CPU 120 does not change the spherical button 04TM102A in the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) when the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed.

The first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is an operation promotion display corresponding to the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with small cracks) of the first special mode, and the first special mode (split hemisphere 04TM141A, 04TM141B is slightly opened). It consists of an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A (in the state of being). When the effect control CPU 120 displays the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the spherical button 04TM102A is slightly changed from the normal mode (split hemisphere 04TM141A, 04TM141B is fully closed) to the first special mode (split hemisphere 04TM141A, 04TM141B). Change to open state).

The second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is an operation promotion display corresponding to the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with moderate cracks) of the second special mode, and the second special mode (split hemisphere 04TM141A, 04TM141B is medium). It consists of an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A (in a state where it is open to some extent). When the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the spherical button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the second special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are medium). Change to the open state).

The third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is an operation promotion display corresponding to the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with large cracks) of the third special mode, and the third special mode (split hemisphere 04TM141A, 04TM141B is maximized). It consists of an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A (in the open state). When the effect control CPU 120 displays the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C, the spherical button 04TM102A is changed from the normal mode (the split hemisphere 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the third special mode (the split hemisphere 04TM141A and 04TM141B are maximally closed). Change to the open state).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17 (19), the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 (immediately before erasing) that had been displayed up to that point was the second special mode (spherical image with moderate cracks). Therefore, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B imitating the spherical button 04TM102A in the second special mode (the state in which the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are moderately open) is displayed. Further, when the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the spherical button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the second special mode (split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B). Change to a moderately open state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (20), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A of the second special aspect when the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed. (At the timing of T18 shown in FIGS. 11-14), the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "777") whose display result is a big hit is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the ally character 04TM010 executes a victory effect to defeat the enemy character 04TM015, and the characters "victory !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of a big hit and to notify the rotation motor 04TM134. By rotating the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131 at the same time. As a result, the light emitted from the rotating illuminant 04TM103 passes through the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B and is irregularly irradiated, so that the interest when a big hit occurs can be further improved.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the occurrence of a big hit by executing the victory effect on the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A in response to the operation promotion display, and the sphere button. By further changing the aspect of 04TM102A according to the operation (rotating the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131 at the same time), the occurrence of a big hit is notified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T19 shown in FIGS. 11-14. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) is fixedly stopped, and the spherical button 04TM102A is changed from the second special mode (the state in which the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are moderately open) to the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are all). Change to closed state). As a result, the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot ends.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 at the time of the final shift is related to the mode of the first change suggestion effect, and in the first change suggestion effect, the ally character is used. , Hold display 04TM002 appears with an item corresponding to the display mode at the time of the final shift (no weapon if the hold display is round, hammer if it is hammer type, sword if it is sword shape), operation related Performs an action effect that takes an action on the display 04TM001. In this way, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 is related to the mode of the change suggestion effect, so that the player can change whether or not the hold display 04TM002 changes and when the hold display 04TM002 changes. By paying attention to the change pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of changing the display mode of the hold display 04TM002.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the change suggestion effect, the rate at which the display mode of the motion-related display 04TM001 changes differs depending on the item possessed by the appearing ally character (the rate of change is [no weapon <hammer <sword]. ] Relationship). That is, which mode is the final mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is determined at a different ratio depending on the mode (type) of the change suggestion effect. Therefore, the player pays attention to the items possessed by the appearing ally character, and can improve the interest of the change suggestion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to encourage the player to operate the final display mode (normal mode, first special mode, second special mode, third special mode) of the operation-related display 04TM001 and the spherical button 04TM102A. The mode of the operation promotion display (special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, third special operation promotion display 04TM035C) corresponds to the above mode. As a result, it is determined at a different ratio which mode the operation promotion display prompting the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A is, depending on the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 at the time of the final shift. Specifically, the case where the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display 04TM002 is the first specific mode (hammer type) or the second specific mode (sword shape) is more operation-related than the case where the display mode is the normal mode. The ratio of display 04TM001 displayed in any of the first to third special aspects is high, and the ratio of any of the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A to the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C displayed as the operation promotion display. Is high. As described above, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 and the mode of the operation promotion display for urging the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A are related to each other, so that the interest can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, an operation promotion display mode for urging the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A (special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, third The special operation promotion display 04TM035C) corresponds to the mode (form) of the actual spherical button 04TM102A. Specifically, the aspect (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is changed from the normal aspect (the split hemisphere 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the final operation promotion display mode (that is, the final operation-related display mode). It changes to the mode (form) corresponding to. In this way, the spherical button 04TM102A, which is an actual operation unit, and the operation promotion display, which is an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A displayed on the image display device 5, are related to operate the spherical button 04TM102A. It is possible to further improve the interest of the production.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11) and 11-17 (14), there are two timings at which the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 changes. As shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the change timing of the first operation-related display 04TM001 is the timing immediately after the start of the change display (the timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 11-14), and the second operation. The change timing of the related display 04TM001 is the timing after the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is completed (the timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 11-14). In the present embodiment, the more the number of times the display mode of the operation-related display is changed, the higher the expectation of a big hit is in the final display mode of the motion-related display (at least one special mode is obtained by one change). Two changes are at least the second special embodiment). Therefore, by providing a change pattern in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display mode of the operation-related display changes within one variable display period, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and improve the interest. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (8) to 11-17 (13), the operation-related display 04TM001 is before the reach state is established when the variable display is executed. Even during the period, it is displayed in the special production area 04TM003. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, it is possible to change the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 at the timing before the reach state is established. According to such a configuration, with respect to the variable display being executed, the operation-related display 04TM001 is increased in interest within the period (timing before the reach state is established) in which the expectation of big hit is not so high, and the operation is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using the related display 04TM001.

Further, in this embodiment, as an effect of urging the operation of the push button 04TM102B, an effect of displaying the operation promotion display 04TM030 (see FIG. 11-17 (15)) can be executed, and the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A is urged. As the effects, the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A (see FIG. 11-19 (25)), the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B (see FIG. 11-17 (19)), and the third It is possible to execute an effect of displaying any of the special operation promotion display 04TM035C. Here, the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed immediately after the reach state is established, and when the push button 04TM102B is operated while the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed, the first mode (“CHANGE ??”) or The cut-in notice effect of the second aspect (“CHANGE !!”) is executed. On the other hand, the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C are during the execution of the super reach effect (battle effect) after the reach state is established. The spherical button 04TM102A was operated when any of the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C was displayed. In that case, an effect image notifying the victory or defeat of the battle is displayed, and the display result is notified.

As described above, as an operation effect executed by operating the push button 04TM102B in response to the operation promotion display (operation promotion display 04TM030), there is a cut-in notice effect, while an operation promotion display (special operation promotion display). As an operation effect executed by operating the spherical button 04TM102A according to any of 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C), a battle There is a notification effect of the victory / defeat result (display result). In the present embodiment, when the push button 04TM102B is operated, it is immediately after the reach state is established, and the fluctuation pattern is one of "normal reach loss", "super reach loss", "normal reach jackpot", and "super reach jackpot". On the other hand, when the spherical button 04TM102A is operated, it is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect after the reach state is established, so the fluctuation patterns are "super reach loss" and "super reach jackpot". It may be one of.

That is, when the push button 04TM102B is operated, there is a possibility that the normal reach ends, but when the spherical button 04TM102A is operated, the super reach is always developed. Since the expectation of a big hit is higher when developing into a super reach than when ending with a normal reach, the expectation of a big hit is higher when operating the spherical button 04TM102A than when operating the push button 04TM102B. As a result, the player becomes interested in which button, the push button 04TM102B or the spherical button 04TM102A, will be operated (whether the operation promotion display corresponding to which button operation is displayed). It is possible to improve the interest in the operation production.

Further, as described above, the operation-related display and the operation promotion display related to the sphere button 04TM102A correspond to each other, and the operation promotion display related to the sphere button 04TM102A is the special operation promotion display 04TM035 <first special operation promotion display 04TM035A <second. The expectation of a big hit increases in the order of special operation promotion display 04TM035B <third special operation promotion display 04TM035C. Therefore, the player pays attention to which of the normal mode, the first special mode, the second special mode, and the third special mode the motion-related display is.

(Specific example of executing change suggestion effect once)
Next, a specific example of executing the change suggestion effect once will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-17, 11-15, 11-16, and 11-19. 11-17 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the change suggestion effect is executed once, and FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and 11-19 have 1 change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it is executed once.

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing" and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is "super reach loss". Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, and the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other is executed as a super reach effect. Then, by executing the defeat effect in which the ally character is finally defeated, the display result is notified that the display result is out of order.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S04TM1010 that the final display mode of the operation-related display is the first special mode [crack (small)] in the change suggestion effect determination process, and in step S04TM1020, the operation-related display. It is decided that the change pattern of the display is the change pattern 111 (normal → crack (small)), and in step S04TM1040, it is decided that the first change suggestion effect is the third change suggestion effect (sword), and the step In S04TM1050, it is decided that the change pattern of the hold display is the change pattern 226 (normal → hammer → sword).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first SU notice effect (does not execute the second SU notice effect) in step S04TM2040 in the change start effect determination process, and performs the cut-in notice effect in step S04TM2070. I have decided not to do it. In the following, FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and 11-19 show examples when it is decided to perform one change suggestion effect.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the determination that the first change suggestion effect is the third change suggestion effect (sword), as in the case where the change suggestion effect is executed twice. Then, the third change suggestion effect is started (FIGS. 11-15 (9) and (10)). As a result of executing this third change suggestion effect, the operation-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) to the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks).

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the effect control CPU 120 ends the third change suggestion effect (erases the ally character 04TM010C that has performed the action with the sword). The first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect is started based on the decision to execute the first SU notice effect. In the present embodiment, when the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect is started, a small window is displayed in the upper center of the image display device 5, and a ally character is displayed in the small window. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with small cracks) of the first special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, FIG. 11-19 (21) As shown in (at the timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 11-18), the second stage (step 2) of the first SU notice effect is started. In the present embodiment, when the second stage (step 2) of the first SU notice effect is started, a window larger than the first stage is displayed in the upper center of the image display device 5, and the ally character and " The word "chance" is displayed. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with small cracks) of the first special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first SU notice effect (erases the window and the ally character and the character "chance" displayed in the window). At the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established, the decorative symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, so that the reach state is set and the upper part of the image display device 5 is set. Is displayed with the characters "Reach !!" (timing of T11 in FIG. 11-18). Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with small cracks) of the first special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (23), the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the ally character 04TM010 and the enemy character 04TM015 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T12 in FIG. 11-18). Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with small cracks) of the first special aspect is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (24), the effect control CPU 120 continuously executes display control of the battle effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T13 in FIG. 11-18). During this period, the display control regarding the middle part of the battle effect (the effect image in which the ally character 04TM010 is jumping toward the enemy character 04TM015) is continuously executed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays an effect image on the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image with small cracks) of the first special aspect displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the operation-related display 04TM001 shining. In this way, the effect image is displayed on the operation-related display 04TM001 during the period in which the display control of the battle effect is continuously executed in the image display device 5, so that the player is made to pay attention to the operation-related display 04TM001. , You can have a sense of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-19 (25), the effect control CPU 120 is continuously executing display control of the battle effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (at the timing of T14 in FIG. 11-18). The operation-related display 04TM001 of the first special aspect accompanied by the effect image is erased from the special effect area 04TM003, and an operation promotion display for urging the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed in the center of the screen. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is a display mode that reflects the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 (immediately before erasing) that has been displayed until then, and is larger than the operation-related display 04TM001 (the display range is larger). Since it is displayed in the center of the screen (widely), it has higher visibility for the player than the operation-related display 04TM001. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is an image imitating the shape of the spherical button 04TM102A and includes the characters "Blow !!", so that the player can easily operate the spherical button 04TM102A once. It is possible to grasp.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-19 (25), the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 (immediately before erasing) that had been displayed up to that point was the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks). The first special operation promotion display 04TM035A imitating the spherical button 04TM102A in the first special mode (the state in which the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are slightly open) is displayed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 displays the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the spherical button 04TM102A is changed from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the first special mode (split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B). Change to a slightly open state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (26), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A of the first special aspect when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed. (At the timing of T15 shown in FIGS. 11-18), the combination of decorative symbols (“232” in this example) whose display result is off is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the ally character 04TM010 executes a defeat effect to be defeated by the enemy character 04TM015, and displays the character "defeat" on the upper part of the image display device 5, thereby notifying that the display result is out of order. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not rotate the rotation motor 04TM134, and does not rotate the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the display result is out of order by executing the defeat effect on the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A in response to the operation promotion display. At the same time, it is notified that the display result is out of order by not changing the aspect of the spherical button 04TM102A according to the operation (not rotating the light emitting body 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T16 shown in FIGS. 11-18. The combination of decorative symbols (“232”) is fixedly stopped, and the spherical button 04TM102A is moved from the first special mode (the state in which the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are slightly open) to the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed). Change to state). As a result, the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the out-of-super reach is completed.

(Specific example of the first change suggestion production)
Next, a specific example in the case of executing the first change suggestion effect corresponding to the hold display in the normal mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-20. FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the hold display of the advance notice target is a normal mode and the change suggestion effect is executed once.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-20 (1) to (5), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode of the operation-related display is the normal mode in step S04TM1010 in the change suggestion effect determination process. In step S04TM1020, it is decided that the change pattern of the operation-related display is the change pattern 102 (normal → normal), and in step S04TM1040, the first change suggestion effect is the first change suggestion effect (without weapon). I have decided. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-20 (1) to (4) and (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the operation-related display in step S04TM1010 in the change suggestion effect determination process to the third special. It was decided to set the mode [crack (large)], and in step S04TM1020, the change pattern of the operation-related display was decided to be the change pattern 131 (normal → crack (large)), and in step S04TM1040, the first time. It has been decided that the change suggestion effect will be the first change suggestion effect (without weapons).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in a state where the first reserved storage number is 1. The decorative symbol "4" is fixedly stopped in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Further, the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003, and the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode (round shape) is displayed in the hold display area 04TM004. ing. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. do. In the shift display executed at this time, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and erased. At this time, the hold display 04TM002 is deleted at the timing when the shifted hold display 04TM002 overlaps with the operation-related display 04TM001, so that the player can see whether the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode has been absorbed by the operation-related display 04TM001. looks like. Further, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change suggestion effect while executing the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-20 (4), the first change suggestion effect is executed as the first change suggestion effect at a predetermined timing from the start of the fluctuation. In the present embodiment, with the start of the first change suggestion effect, the ally character 04TM010A without a weapon appears from the right side of the screen. At this time, in the special effect area 04TM003, the operation-related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

Here, when it is decided that the final display mode of the operation-related display is the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (5), the appearing ally character 04TM010A is the operation-related display 04TM001 of the normal mode. Perform the action of hitting the sphere image without cracks without waiting for the weapon. In this way, as a result of performing the effect that the ally character 04TM010A acts on the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, the change pattern 102 (changes in the normal mode in the first change suggestion effect). (Do not), the operation-related display 04TM001 does not change from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) at the end of the first change suggestion effect (FIG. 11-20 (5)). At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the first change suggestion effect. After that, the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed as an operation suggestion display regarding the sphere button 04TM102A, but the sphere button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) at this time as well.

On the other hand, when it is decided that the final display mode of the motion-related display is the third special mode, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (6), the appearing ally character 04TM010A is the motion-related display 04TM001 of the normal mode. Perform the action of hitting (a spherical image without cracks) without waiting for the weapon. In this way, as a result of performing the effect that the ally character 04TM010A acts on the operation-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, the change pattern 131 (crack [large] in the first change suggestion effect) is obtained. At the end of the first change suggestion effect, the motion-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) to the third special mode (spherical image with large cracks) based on (changing). (Fig. 11-20 (6)). At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the first change suggestion effect. After that, the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed as the operation suggestion display regarding the sphere button 04TM102A, and the sphere button 04TM102A changes from the normal mode (fully closed state) to the third special mode (fully open state).

As described above, when the hold display is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode (when it is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) or the second specific mode (sword)), the first time. As the change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect or the third change suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, if the hold display does not change from the normal mode, the second change suggestion effect and the third change suggestion effect are not executed, but the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) remains possible. As a result, the player can have the expectation that the motion-related display will change even if the hold display remains in the normal mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the expectation when the hold display does not change in the normal mode.

(Modification example)
(1) In the above embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode, an example is shown in which the hold display is displayed larger than the hold display in the normal mode. Not limited to this, it is already displayed when the hold display becomes the first specific mode or the second specific mode at the time of starting winning, or when the hold display changes from the normal mode to the first specific mode or the second specific mode at the time of shift. By changing (moving) the display position of the hold display in the normal mode, the hold display in the first specific mode or the second specific mode may be emphasized and displayed. For example, when the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer type) or the second specific mode (sword shape) at the time of starting winning, or when the hold display is displayed in the normal mode to the first specific mode (hammer type) or the first mode at the time of shift. 2 When changing to a specific mode (sword shape), the display interval of the hold display of the normal mode already displayed is displayed as the first specific mode (hammer shape) or the second specific mode (sword shape). By displaying the hold display narrower than before, it may be emphasized that the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. When the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode, or when the display mode of the hold display changes, the effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the target hold display to emphasize it. , A sound effect may be output.

(2) In the above embodiment, there are a first specific mode (hammer shape) and a second specific mode (sword shape) as display modes of the hold display different from the normal mode (round shape), and the operation-related display. Regarding the degree of expectation of change in, there is a relationship of 1st specific mode (hammer shape) <2nd specific mode (sword shape), and when the hold display of the 2nd specific mode (sword shape) is displayed, the third An example was shown in which the display mode of the movement-related display changes at a rate of 100% when a change suggestion effect (effect by a ally character holding a sword) is executed. As a display mode, a third specific mode (sword shape) is provided, and when the hold display of the third specific mode (sword shape) is displayed, a fourth change suggestion effect (effect by a ally character holding a spear) is displayed. ) Is executed, and the display mode of the operation-related display may be changed to the third special mode [crack (large)] at a rate of 100%. Here, in the above example, since the big hit is confirmed when the display mode of the operation-related display is the third special mode [crack (large)], the hold display of the third specific mode (spear shape) is displayed. The jackpot will be confirmed. By providing such an effect pattern related to the hold display and the operation-related display, it is possible to further improve the interest of the change suggestion effect related to the hold display and the operation-related display.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the hold display shifts (at the time of the first shift, at the time of the second shift, at the time of the final shift). Not limited to the form, it may be possible to change the display mode of the hold display at a timing other than the shift time. For example, during the execution of the variable display, a character holding a placard with "hold change" appears from the right side of the screen, and the display mode of the hold display at the position where the character stops changes. Is also good. That is, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing the action effect acting on the hold display of the notice target.

(4) In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect includes the first change suggestion effect (without weapon), the second change suggestion effect (hammer), and the third change suggestion effect (sword), and the weapon of the ally character. An example is shown in which the type of change suggestion effect is different depending on the presence or absence of the weapon and the type of weapon, but the type of change suggestion effect is different depending on the type of character that appears, not limited to such a form. Is also good. For example, the change suggestion effect may be diversified by providing a character having a low rate of changing the motion-related display and a character having a high rate of changing the motion-related display.

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 (6), the operation-related display of the third special aspect in which the big hit is confirmed is a spherical image with large cracks, but in addition to this. Characters suggesting that the display result is a big hit may be displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. For example, when displaying the operation-related display of the third special aspect, characters such as "destroy" or "win", or "complete destruction" or "complete victory" may be displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. Since these characters have a higher display priority than the motion-related display (the display layer is higher), the player appears to be displayed in front of the motion-related display. Further, it may be suggested whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" or "probability variable jackpot" depending on the content of the characters displayed at this time and the color of the characters. For example, when the color of the characters displayed in the special production area 04TM003 is white, the ratio of normal big hits is high, and when the color of the characters displayed in the special production area 04TM003 is red, it is a probability variation big hit. The ratio may be increased. Further, when the character displayed in the special production area 04TM003 does not include the character "complete", the ratio of normal big hits is high, and the character displayed in the special production area 04TM003 includes the character "complete". If this is the case, the percentage of probable change jackpots may be increased.

(6) In the above embodiment, as display information different from the operation-related display, it may be possible to display an active display corresponding to a variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) being executed. For example, this active display may be displayed in an active display area provided between the special effect area 04TM003 and the hold display area 04TM004 on the effect screen. Further, the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the display mode (display color) of this active display. Further, an effect of changing the display mode (display color) of this active display may be executed. As described above, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the operation-related display are related to the display mode of the operation promotion display and the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A, both of which indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. However, by making it possible to display the active display separately from the operation-related display, the player is focused on the display mode (degree of cracking) of the operation-related display, and the display mode (display color) of the active display is changed. Can also attract the attention of the player, and can give diversity to the production that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example of changing the display mode of the operation-related display is shown as an effect related to the display result of the variable display being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display not being executed is not limited to this. As a look-ahead notice effect related to the display result, the display mode of the operation-related display may be changed. For example, when the first reserved storage number is 1 or more, the look-ahead advance notice effect is obtained by executing the change suggestion effect one or more times for the operation-related display over a plurality of variable displays. By the time the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed (until the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is shifted to the special effect area), the display mode of the operation-related display is changed. You may change it.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (19) and 11-19 (25), the timing for changing the aspect (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is within one variation display period. In, an example is shown in which the super reach effect (battle effect) is being executed only once. As described above, the number of times the mode (morphology) of the sphere button 04TM102A is changed is the same as or less than the number of times the display mode of the motion-related display is changed, so that the sphere including the movable portion (split hemisphere) is included. The control load that changes the mode (morphology) of the button 04TM102A is reduced, and the frequency of failure of the movable part (split hemisphere) is suppressed.

Not limited to such a form, the timing for changing the aspect (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A may be provided a plurality of times within one variation display period. For example, the mode of the spherical button 04TM102A may be changed in accordance with the timing when the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 displayed in the special effect area 04TM003 of the image display device 5 is changed. As shown in FIGS. 11-16 (11), the spherical button 04TM102A is normally pressed at the timing when the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode to the first special mode (at the timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 11-14). The mode is changed from the first special mode to the first special mode, and as shown in FIG. 11-17 (14), the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is changed from the first special mode to the second special mode (in FIG. 11-14). (At the timing of T12 shown), the spherical button 04TM102A may be changed from the first special mode to the second special mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (19) and 11-19 (25), the aspect (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is the final of the operation-related display 04TM001 at a rate of 100%. Although an example is shown in which the mode (form) corresponds to a specific display mode, the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is not limited to such a mode, and the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A depends on the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001. It may be decided at different ratios.

For example, when the display result is "off", when the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is the first special mode, the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the normal mode is 60%. When the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the first special mode is 40%, but the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is the second special mode. The ratio of the special operation promotion display 04TM035 and the spherical button 04TM102A being the normal mode is 70%, the ratio of the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A being displayed and the spherical button 04TM102A being the first special mode is 20%. The second special operation promotion display 04TM035B may be displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the second special mode may be 10%.

On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit", when the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is the first special mode, the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the normal mode is 40. %, And the ratio of the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A being displayed and the spherical button 04TM102A being the first special mode is 60%, but when the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is the second special mode. , The ratio that the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode is 5%, and the ratio that the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed and the spherical button 04TM102A is in the first special mode is It may be 25%, and the ratio of the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B being displayed and the spherical button 04TM102A being the second special mode may be 70%.

That is, the aspect (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A and the case where the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is the second special mode is higher than the case where the final display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 is the first special mode. The reliability of the jackpot expectation suggested by the operation promotion display corresponding to this may be increased.

(10) In the above embodiment, only when the display result is "big hit" and the winning effect is executed (when the combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed), light is emitted in response to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A. An example of rotating the body 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the light emitting body 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 are rotated in the wake of the development of the super reach effect (battle effect). Alternatively, the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation axis 04TM131 may be rotated when the ally character becomes dominant over the enemy character in the middle part of the super reach effect (battle effect).

(11) In the above embodiment, once the split hemisphere 04TM141A and the split hemisphere 04TM141B are split (when they are no longer fully closed) during the variable display, until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. There is no change in the crack width (distance between the split hemisphere 04TM141A and the split hemisphere 04TM141B), for example, the spherical button 04TM102A does not change from the second special aspect to the first special aspect. As a result, the expectation is maintained until the player finishes the operation. Not limited to such a form, after the split hemisphere 04TM141A and the split hemisphere 04TM141B are once split (after they are no longer fully closed) during the variable display, until the sphere button 04TM102A is operated. , There may be a change in which the crack width becomes smaller. For example, in the middle part of the super reach effect (battle effect), when the ally character becomes inferior to the enemy character, the crack width may be reduced, and the spherical button 04TM102A may be used from the second special mode. It may be changed to the first special aspect.

(12) In the above embodiment, when notifying the occurrence of a big hit, the rotary motor 04TM134 is rotated to simultaneously rotate the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotary shaft 04TM131 to improve the interest. Not limited to this, the rotation motor 04TM134 is rotated during a period controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player, for example, a period controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a period controlled to a high base state. The light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131 may be rotated at the same time.

(13) In the above embodiment, the operation unit that can be operated by the player is the push button 04TM102B and the spherical button 04TM102A, both of which are operation units that can be pressed by the player. Not limited to the form, a predetermined operation effect (cut-in notice effect or result notification effect) may be executed in response to the player touching a predetermined area provided with the touch sensor. A predetermined motion effect (cut-in notice effect or result notification effect) may be executed according to the detection of the player's motion by the infrared sensor or the like.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the operation unit operated by the player is the push button 04TM102B, the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed, and when the operation unit operated by the player is the spherical button 04TM102A. , Special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, or third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed. That is, it is possible to change the mode of the operation promotion display prompting the player to operate the operation unit according to the operation unit operated by the player. When the operation promotion display corresponding to the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed and the operation promotion display corresponding to the push button 04TM102B is not displayed, the operation promotion display corresponding to the spherical button 04TM102A is not displayed and the push button 04TM102B is supported. The rate of big hits is higher than when the operation promotion display is displayed.

In such a configuration, at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect (for example, the timing at the end of the battle), either the operation promotion display corresponding to the spherical button 04TM102A or the operation promotion display corresponding to the push button 04TM102B is selectively selected. It may be displayed. That is, when the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A is urged at the timing immediately before notifying the victory or defeat (display result) of the battle, the big hit is made at a higher rate than when the operation of the push button 04TM102B is urged. A production configuration may be adopted. Then, when such an effect configuration is adopted, it is suggested by the display mode of the operation-related display which operation unit (push button 04TM102B or spherical button 04TM102A) the operation promotion display is displayed. Is also good.

For example, during the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state and the development of the super reach effect, the operation-related display of the common mode is displayed regardless of which operation unit the operation promotion display corresponds to. (For example, the character "?") Is displayed, and the display mode of the operation-related display is changed to the display mode according to the operation unit to be operated in the middle stage of the super reach effect. For example, if the operation unit to be operated is the push button 04TM102B, the operation-related display is changed from "?" To an image imitating the push button 04TM102B, and if the operation unit to be operated is the spherical button 04TM102A, the operation is performed. The related display is changed from "?" To an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A. Then, at the final stage of the super reach effect, the operation promotion display reflecting the display mode of the final operation-related display is displayed. That is, if the final display mode of the operation-related display is an image imitating the push button 04TM102B, the operation promotion display corresponding to the push button 04TM102B is displayed, and the final display mode of the motion-related display is the spherical button 04TM102A. If it is a simulated image, the operation promotion display corresponding to the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed.

Until the operation promotion display is displayed, the player may not be able to completely grasp which operation unit the operation promotion display corresponds to. For example, when the operation unit whose operation is prompted by the operation promotion display is the push button 04TM102B, the character "?", Which is an operation-related display, is finally displayed in blue at a rate of 80% and a rate of 20%. On the other hand, if the operation part for which the operation is prompted by the operation promotion display is the spherical button 04TM102A, the character "?", Which is the operation-related display, is finally displayed in blue at a rate of 20%. It may be displayed in red at a rate of 80%. In this way, the ratio of the operation promotion display corresponding to each operation unit is different depending on the display mode of the operation-related display, so that the change pattern of the operation-related display is varied and the interest is improved. be able to.

(15) It should be noted that the ratio of which operation unit corresponding to the operation-related display is displayed may be different depending on the display mode of the hold display, and any of them may be displayed according to the display mode of the hold display. The ratio of whether the operation promotion display corresponding to the operation unit is displayed may be different. For example, when the hold display is an image imitating the push button 04TM102B, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is executed, the display mode of the operation-related display is 80% of the characters "?". Changed to an image imitating the push button 04TM102B (20% did not change from the character "?"), And the display mode of the operation-related display became an image imitating the push button 04TM102B. Finally, an operation promotion display prompting the operation of the push button 04TM102B may be displayed. Further, when the hold display is an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is executed, the display mode of the operation-related display is 80% of the characters "?". Changed to an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A (20% did not change from the character "?"), And the display mode of the operation-related display became an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A. Finally, an operation promotion display prompting the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A may be displayed.

(16) In the above embodiment, the display mode of the operation promotion display and the actual mode of the spherical button 04TM102A have a one-to-one correspondence, and when the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed, the spherical button 04TM102A is always normal. When the mode (fully closed state) is set and the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the spherical button 04TM102A is always in the first special mode (the crack width of the split hemisphere is the minimum), and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed. When the sphere button 04TM102A is always in the second special mode (split width of the split hemisphere is medium), and when the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed, the sphere button 04TM102A is always in the third special mode (split width of the split hemisphere). Is the maximum), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the operation unit may be changed to a mode that does not correspond to the display mode of the operation promotion display. For example, when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the spherical button 04TM102A may finally change to the second special mode or the third special mode. However, when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the rate at which the spherical button 04TM102A changes to the second special mode or the rate at which the spherical button 04TM102A changes to the first special mode is higher than the rate at which the sphere button 04TM102A changes to the third special mode. Is high. That is, it is assumed that the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation promotion display is higher than the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode different from the mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation promotion display.

Even when the operation unit is configured so as to have a possibility of changing to a mode that does not correspond to the display mode of the operation promotion display in this way, the operation unit is changed to the display mode of the operation promotion display. It shall not change to a mode with lower expectations than the corresponding mode. For example, when the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed, the spherical button 04TM102A does not change from the normal mode, nor does it change only to the first special mode. That is, the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode with a higher expectation than the display mode of the operation promotion display is higher than the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode with a lower expectation than the display mode of the operation promotion display. And.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
An action effect execution means that can execute an action effect by the action of the player,
A movement promotion display execution means that can execute a movement promotion display that encourages the player's movement,
An operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display related to the operation effect,
An action effect executing means capable of executing an action effect acting on the operation-related display is provided.
As the display mode of the specific display, there are a plurality of modes including a normal mode and a specific mode.
As the specific aspect, there are a plurality of aspects including the first specific aspect and the second specific aspect.
As the display mode of the operation-related display, there are a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode.
When the operation-related display is displayed in the second aspect, the ratio of the operation-related display being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that when the operation-related display is displayed in the first aspect.
The operation-related display means can change the display mode of the operation-related display, and when the display mode of the operation-related display is changed, the specific-related display related to the specific display can be displayed. It is possible
When the operation-related display is displayed, the operation promotion display executing means can display an operation promotion display in a mode different from the operation promotion display corresponding to the display mode of the operation-related display.
The action effect executing means has, as the action effect, a first action effect for displaying the first specific related display which is the specific related display related to the first specific aspect, and the specific action effect related to the second specific aspect. It is possible to execute the second action effect that displays the second specific related display, which is the related display.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second action effect is executed, the ratio of the operation-related display displayed in the second aspect is higher than when the first action effect is executed.

Images